Você está na página 1de 255

BSC6900 UMTS

V900R013C00

Site Maintenance Guide


Issue

06

Date

2013-05-29

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

About This Document

About This Document


Purpose
This document describes how to perform the hardware maintenance tasks after the BSC6900
commissioning, to maintain the hardware operation of the BSC6900. The maintenance tasks
involve powering on/off the BSC6900 cabinet, replacing components, and routine maintenance
tasks such as checking LEDs and monitoring the site environment.

Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to the document.
Product Name

Product Version

BSC6900

V900R013C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

Network planning engineers

System engineers

Field engineers

Organization
1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide.
2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations
This section lists the tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance. These tools must be placed
in the equipment room or at nearby places for easy access.
3 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

About This Document

This chapter describes the routine hardware maintenance items of the BSC6900. Different items
require different maintenance methods.
4 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
This chapter describes how to power on and power off the BSC6900. The following is described:
the distribution of the power switches, powering on the BSC6900 cabinet, powering off the
BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation, and powering off the BSC6900 cabinet in case of
emergencies.
5 Cleaning the Fan Box
This chapter describes how to clean a fan box. To ensure stability and reliability of the equipment,
the maintenance personnel should clean each fan box (including the fan boxes in the service
subracks and the fan boxes in the independent fan subrack) regularly, preferably once every
year.
6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters
This chapter describes how to clean and replace an air filter. The air filter protects the boards
and the BSC6900 from dust. If an air filter is damaged, you must replace it with a new one in
time.
7 Replacing Boards and Modules
This chapeter describes how to replace boards of the same hardware version and modules in the
BSC6900 cabinet, which involves replacing the boards and modules, acknowledging a
successful replacement, and handling of the faulty boards. Each section provides an estimated
time for the replacement of the board as a reference.
8 Replacing the Cables
This chapter describes how to replace the Ethernet cable, E1/T1 cable, optical cable, clock signal
cable, cable to the alarm box, and power distribution box monitoring cable. This chapter also
describes how to check that the cables are successfully replaced and how to handle the faulty
cables.
9 LEDs on the Boards
This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
10 DIP Switches on Components
This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
11 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record
This chapter describes the BSC6900 site maintenance record.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

About This Document

Symbol

Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

About This Document

Convention

Description

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt


+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means


the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving


the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide....................................................1
2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations..........................................................................................6
3 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items.....................................................................................7
3.1 Equipment Room Maintenance Items............................................................................................................................8
3.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding Systems................................................................................................8
3.3 Cabinet Maintenance Items..........................................................................................................................................10
3.4 Cable Maintenance Items.............................................................................................................................................11

4 Powering On/Off the BSC6900.................................................................................................13


4.1 Distribution of Power Switches....................................................................................................................................14
4.2 Powering On the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................................15
4.3 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation.........................................................................................................17
4.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases...........................................................................................................18

5 Cleaning the Fan Box..................................................................................................................19


6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters...................................................................................21
6.1 Position of the Air Filters.............................................................................................................................................22
6.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22 Cabinet....................................................................................24
6.3 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-21-N Cabinet................................................................................26
6.4 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet Door.....................................................................................28
6.5 Replacing the Air Filters...............................................................................................................................................29

7 Replacing Boards and Modules................................................................................................31


7.1 Procedure for Replacing a Board..................................................................................................................................34
7.1.1 Removing a Board.....................................................................................................................................................34
7.1.2 Inserting a Board.......................................................................................................................................................37
7.2 Replacing an AEUa Board...........................................................................................................................................39
7.3 Replacing an AOUa Board...........................................................................................................................................42
7.4 Replacing an AOUc Board...........................................................................................................................................46
7.5 Replacing a DPUb/DPUe Board...................................................................................................................................49
7.6 Replacing an FG2a Board.............................................................................................................................................51
7.7 Replacing an FG2c Board.............................................................................................................................................55
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Contents

7.8 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa Board..................................................................................................................................58


7.9 Replacing a GOUa Board.............................................................................................................................................61
7.10 Replacing a GOUc Board...........................................................................................................................................64
7.11 Replacing a NIUa Board.............................................................................................................................................67
7.12 Replacing an OMU Board..........................................................................................................................................70
7.12.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU Board......................................................................................71
7.12.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU Mode...................................................................................76
7.12.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode............................................................................101
7.12.4 Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with an OMUc Board................................................................................115
7.12.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-System Mode..............................................................132
7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board...................................................................................................141
7.13 Replacing a PAMU Board........................................................................................................................................145
7.14 Replacing a PEUa Board..........................................................................................................................................148
7.15 Replacing a POUa Board..........................................................................................................................................152
7.16 Replacing a POUc Board..........................................................................................................................................155
7.17 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board.............................................................................................................................158
7.18 Replacing a UOIa Board...........................................................................................................................................161
7.19 Replacing a UOIc Board...........................................................................................................................................165
7.20 Replacing an SPUa Board........................................................................................................................................168
7.21 Replacing an SPUb Board........................................................................................................................................171
7.22 Replacing a Subrack.................................................................................................................................................174
7.23 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack..................................................................................................................178
7.24 Replacing the Power Distribution Box.....................................................................................................................179
7.25 Replacing the Fan Box.............................................................................................................................................183
7.26 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module.................................................................................................................186
7.27 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner...................................................................................................................189

8 Replacing the Cables................................................................................................................191


8.1 Replacing a Power Cable............................................................................................................................................193
8.2 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................195
8.3 Replacing an Optical Cable........................................................................................................................................197
8.4 Replacing an Ethernet Cable......................................................................................................................................199
8.5 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable.................................................................................................................................201
8.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable...........................................................................................................................203
8.7 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable....................................................................................................204
8.8 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm Box...............................................................................................................205
8.9 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box...................................................................207
8.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack..............................................................208
8.11 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable.....................................................................................................................209

9 LEDs on the Boards...................................................................................................................212


9.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board..........................................................................................................................................214
9.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board..........................................................................................................................................214
9.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board..........................................................................................................................................215
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Contents

9.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board..........................................................................................................................................215


9.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board..........................................................................................................................................216
9.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board...........................................................................................................................................217
9.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board...........................................................................................................................................217
9.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board...............................................................................................................................218
9.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board..........................................................................................................................................219
9.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board........................................................................................................................................219
9.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board.......................................................................................................................................220
9.12 LEDs on the OMUc Board.......................................................................................................................................221
9.13 LEDs on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................................................222
9.14 LEDs on the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................................................222
9.15 LEDs on the POUa Board........................................................................................................................................223
9.16 LEDs on the POUc Board........................................................................................................................................224
9.17 LEDs on the SCUa Board.........................................................................................................................................224
9.18 LEDs on the SCUb Board........................................................................................................................................225
9.19 LEDs on the SPUa Board.........................................................................................................................................226
9.20 LEDs on the SPUb Board.........................................................................................................................................227
9.21 LEDs on the UOIa Board.........................................................................................................................................228
9.22 LEDs on the UOIc Board.........................................................................................................................................228

10 DIP Switches on Components..............................................................................................230


10.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.......................................................................................................................................231
10.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board............................................................................................................................233
10.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board...........................................................................................................................236
10.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board.............................................................................................................................238
10.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board............................................................................................................................239
10.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board...............................................................................................................................241
10.7 DIP Switches on the POUa Board............................................................................................................................243

11 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record......................................................................................246

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide

Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site


Maintenance Guide

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide.

06 (2013-05-29)
This is the sixth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 05 (2013-01-28), this issue includes the following new topics:
Compared with issue 05 (2013-01-28), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content

Description

Scenario: Replacing Two


OMUa Boards with Two
OMUc Boards

The steps using USB installation disk is deleted and


modified to install manually.

Compared with issue 05 (2013-01-28), this issue does not exclude any topics.

05 (2013-01-28)
This is the fifth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 04 (2012-09-17), this issue includes the following new topics:
Compared with issue 04 (2012-09-17), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content

Description

Scenario: Old and New OMU


Boards Running the Same OS

The fifth step of replacing an OMU board is modified.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-09-17), this issue does not exclude any topics.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide

04 (2012-09-17)
This is the fourth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-01-05), this issue includes the following new topics:
l

7.12.4 Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with an OMUc Board


Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa Boards with Two OMUc Boards
Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with Two OMUc Boards
Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with an OMUc Board

Compared with issue 03 (2012-01-05), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content

Description

7.22 Replacing a Subrack

The effect of replacing a subrack on the service in the


context is added.

7.26 Replacing the Pluggable


Optical Module

The parameters of optical modules is added.

Compared with issue 03 (2012-01-05), this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2012-01-05)
This is the third commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 02 (2011-08-31), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 02 (2011-08-31), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Content

Description

7.12.1 Checking OMU Status


Before Replacing an OMU
Board

The process of querying and recording the BSC local IP


address, VLAN IDs for communication between the
OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication
between the OMU and LMT/EMS (Element Manager
System) configured on the OMU to be switched is added.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide

Content

Description

l Scenario: Old and New


OMU Boards Running the
Same OS

The explanation of reconfiguring the the BSC local IP


address, VLAN IDs for communication between the
OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication
between the OMU and LMT/EMS is added.

l Scenario: Old OMU Board


Running Dopra Linux and
New OMU Board Running
Suse Linux/Windows
l Scenario: Old OMU
Running Suse Linux and
New OMU Running Dopra
Linux
l Scenario: Old and New
OMUs Running the Same
Operating System
l Scenario: Old OMU
Running Dopra Linux and
New OMU Running Suse
Linux/Windows
l Scenario: Old OMU Running
Dopra Linux and New OMU
Running Windows
l Scenario: Old OMU
Running Suse Linux and
New OMU Running Dopra
Linux
l 7.12.5 Scenario: Replacing
Active and Standby OMUs
in Dual-System Mode
l Scenario: Replacing Two
OMUa Boards with Two
OMUc Boards

Compared with issue 02 (2011-08-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2011-08-31)
This is the second commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 01 (2011-04-25), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 01 (2011-04-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Content

Description

Scenario: Old and New OMU


Boards Running the Same OS

The description of the uninstall the OMU applications is


added.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide

Compared with issue 01 (2011-04-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2011-04-25)
This is the first commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), this issue includes the following new topics:
l

7.27 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner

7.12.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU Board

7.12.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU Mode

Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same OS

Scenario: Old OMU Board Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board Running
Suse Linux/Windows

Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux

Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux

7.12.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode

Scenario: Old and New OMUs Running the Same Operating System

Scenario: Old OMU Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Running Suse Linux/
Windows

Scenario: Old OMU Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Running Windows

Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux

Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux

7.12.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-System Mode

Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa Boards with Two OMUc Boards

7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board

Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft B (2011-03-21)
This is the Draft B release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue includes the following new topics:
l

7.11 Replacing a NIUa Board

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2011-01-31)
This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

8.11 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Site Maintenance Guide

Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue incorporates the following
changes:
Content

Description

7.12 Replacing an OMU Board

The description of OMUc board is added.

7.1.1 Removing a Board

The description of the new ejector levers is added.

7.1.2 Inserting a Board

The description of the new ejector levers is added.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations

Site Maintenance Tool Preparations

This section lists the tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance. These tools must be placed
in the equipment room or at nearby places for easy access.
Table 2-1 lists the maintenance items and tools.
Table 2-1 Maintenance items and tools for site maintenance

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Item

Tools

Cleaning the fan


box

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, vacuum cleaner, ESD soft brush,
and clean cotton cloth

Cleaning the air


filters

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and clean cotton cloth

Replacing a board

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, ESD box


or bag, clean cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner

Replacing the fan


box, power
distribution box,
or subrack

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, ESD box


or bag, diagonal pliers, dry cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner

Replacing the
cables

ESD wrist strap, Ethernet meter, Ethernet cable pliers, flat-head


screwdriver, clean cotton cloth, fiber cleaner, ESD gloves, and diagonal
pliers

Tools summary for


the BSC6900 site
maintenance

ESD gloves, ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head


screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner,
Ethernet cable tester, Ethernet cable pliers, vacuum cleaner, ESD soft
brush, and diagonal pliers

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the routine hardware maintenance items of the BSC6900. Different items
require different maintenance methods.
3.1 Equipment Room Maintenance Items
This section describes the maintenance items in the BSC6900 equipment room. The items
include the ambience alarm, anti-theft device, door and window, temperature, humidity, indoor
air conditioner, and dustproof condition.
3.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding Systems
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 power supply and the grounding
system. The maintenance items consist of power cables, voltage, PGND cables, components
inside the cabinet, earth resistance, batteries, and rectifier.
3.3 Cabinet Maintenance Items
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet. The maintenance items
consist of fans, air filters, cabinet surface, locks and doors of cabinet, cabinet cleanliness, fan
box cleanliness, ESD wrist strap, cabinet components, and idle optical ports on boards.
3.4 Cable Maintenance Items
This section describes the cable maintenance items. The maintenance items consist of cable
labels, connectors and sockets, connection of E1/T1 cables, connection of Ethernet cables, and
connection of optical cables.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

3.1 Equipment Room Maintenance Items


This section describes the maintenance items in the BSC6900 equipment room. The items
include the ambience alarm, anti-theft device, door and window, temperature, humidity, indoor
air conditioner, and dustproof condition.
Table 3-1 lists the maintenance items of the equipment room.
Table 3-1 Maintenance items of the equipment room
Item

Interval

Operation Guide

Reference
Standard

Alarms on
equipment room
environment

Daily

Check whether power


supply alarms, fire
alarms, or smoke
alarms are generated.

No power supply
alarms, fire alarms, or
smoke alarms are
reported.

Check anti-theft nets,


equipment room
doors, and windows

Weekly

Check whether the


anti-theft nets, doors,
and windows are
intact.

The anti-theft device,


door, and window are
in good condition.

Check room
temperature

Daily

Check the
temperature indicator
in the equipment
room.

The temperature is
between 15C and 30
C.

Check room
humidity

Daily

Check the humidity


indicator in the
equipment room.

The humidity is
between 40% and
65%.

Check indoor air


conditioner

Weekly

Check the running


status of the air
conditioner.

The air conditioner


works properly. The
temperature set on the
air conditioner is
consistent with that
on the thermometer.

Check dustproof
condition

Weekly

Check the equipment


shell, equipment
interior, floor, and
desktop.

The cabinet surface is


clean, and the cabinet
interior is dustfree.

3.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding Systems


This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 power supply and the grounding
system. The maintenance items consist of power cables, voltage, PGND cables, components
inside the cabinet, earth resistance, batteries, and rectifier.
Table 3-2 lists the maintenance items of the power supply and grounding systems.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

Table 3-2 Maintenance items of the power supply and grounding systems
Item

Interval

Operation Guide

Reference Standard

Power cables

Monthly or
quarterly

Check all the power cables


between the power supply
system and the power
distribution box of the
cabinet.

l The power cables are not


aged.
l The PGND cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.

Voltage

Monthly or
quarterly

Measure the voltage of the


power supply using a
multimeter.

The voltage of the power


supply is within the standard
voltage range. For details,
refer to Technical
Specifications of the Cabinet.

PGND cables

Monthly or
quarterly

Check all the PGND


cables and ground bars.

l The PGND cables are not


aged.
l The PGND cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.
l The ground bars are not
corroded. Proper anticorrosion measures are
taken.

Components
inside the
cabinet

Monthly or
quarterly

Check the connection


terminals and captive
screws of all the PGND
cables.

l The PGND cables are not


aged.
l The PGND cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.
l The connection terminals
and captive screws are
securely and correctly
connected, and they are
not corroded.

Earth
resistance

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Monthly or
quarterly

Use an electric earth


resistance tester to
measure the earth
resistance and keep a
record.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The grounding resistance is


less than or equal to 10 ohms.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

Item

Interval

Operation Guide

Reference Standard

Batteries and
rectifier

Yearly

Check the batteries and


rectifier of the power
supply system in each
piece of equipment room.

l The batteries are normal.


There is no battery
leakage, swelling, or
corrosion.
l The capacity of all
batteries meets the
standard requirements
and the batteries are
correctly connected.
l The rectifier meets the
required specifications.

3.3 Cabinet Maintenance Items


This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet. The maintenance items
consist of fans, air filters, cabinet surface, locks and doors of cabinet, cabinet cleanliness, fan
box cleanliness, ESD wrist strap, cabinet components, and idle optical ports on boards.
Table 3-3 lists the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet.
Table 3-3 BSC6900 cabinet maintenance items

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Item

Interval

Operation Guide

Reference Standard

Fans

Weekly or
monthly

Check the running state of


the fans.

The fan works properly


without making abnormal
sounds.

Air filters

Quarterly

Check the air filters of


each cabinet.

The air filters are dust-free


and damage-free. Clean the
dirty air filter according to
6 Cleaning and Replacing
the Air Filters. Replace
the damaged air filter
according to 6.5 Replacing
the Air Filters.

Cabinet surface

Monthly or
quarterly

Check the cabinet surface


and the cabinet labels.

The cabinet surface is


intact. The labels are
legible.

Locks and
doors

Monthly or
quarterly

Check whether the lock is


normal and the door can be
opened and closed easily.

The locks and the doors of


the cabinet work properly.

Cleanness of
the cabinets

Monthly or
quarterly

Check whether the cabinet


is clean.

The cabinet surface is


clean. The interior of the
cabinet is dust-free.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

Item

Interval

Operation Guide

Reference Standard

Cleanness of
the fan box

Yearly

Clean the fan box


according to 5 Cleaning
the Fan Box.

The surface of the fan box


is clean. The interior of the
fan box is dust-free.

Check the LEDs of every


component inside the
cabinet.

The LEDs work properly.


For details on the LEDs,
refer to the following part:
Front Panel of the Power
Distribution Box, Fan Box
(Configured with the
PFCU Board), LEDs on the
Boards.

Inside of the
cabinet

Monthly or
quarterly

Measure the grounding


resistance of the ESD wrist
strap as follows:
ESD wrist strap

Quarterly

l Use an ESD wrist strap


tester to test the ESD
wrist strap.
l Use a multimeter.

Protection of
the idle optical
ports on boards

Monthly or
quarterly

Check the dustproof caps


on the idle optical ports.

l When you use an ESD


wrist strap tester, the
GOOD LED on it is
ON.
l When you use a
multimeter, the
grounding resistance of
the ESD wrist strap
ranges from 0.8
megohm to 1.2
megohms.
The dustproof caps are on
the idle optical ports.

3.4 Cable Maintenance Items


This section describes the cable maintenance items. The maintenance items consist of cable
labels, connectors and sockets, connection of E1/T1 cables, connection of Ethernet cables, and
connection of optical cables.
Table 3-4 describes the cable maintenance items.
Table 3-4 Cable maintenance items

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Item

Interval

Operation Guide

Reference Standard

Check
connectors and
sockets

Monthly or
quarterly

Check the insulators of


the connectors or the
sockets.

The insulators of the


connectors or the sockets
are clean.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Item

3 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

Interval

Operation Guide

Reference Standard
l The E1/T1 cables are
properly connected.

E1/T1 cable
connections

Yearly

Check the connections


of the E1/T1 cables.

l The E1/T1 cables are


intact.
l The labels on the cables
are legible.
l The Ethernet cables are
properly connected.

Ethernet cable
connections

Yearly

Check the connections


of the Ethernet cables.

l The Ethernet cables are


intact.
l The labels on the cables
are legible.
l The optical cables are
properly connected.

Optical cable
connections

Yearly

Check the connections


of the optical cables.

l The optical cables are


intact.
l The labels on the cables
are legible.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

Powering On/Off the BSC6900

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to power on and power off the BSC6900. The following is described:
the distribution of the power switches, powering on the BSC6900 cabinet, powering off the
BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation, and powering off the BSC6900 cabinet in case of
emergencies.
4.1 Distribution of Power Switches
The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR provides 20 (10 x 2) routes of power outputs. This
section describes the mapping between the eight routes of power outputs from the power
distribution box of the MPR/EPR and the components in the cabinet.
4.2 Powering On the Cabinet
This section describes how to power on the BSC6900 cabinet and how to handle common power
failures in the components of the cabinet.
4.3 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation
This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation. You must
power off the BSC6900 cabinet when relocating the equipment or before a forecasted territorial
power blackout. Powering off the BSC6900 cabinet disrupts all the ongoing services. Therefore,
you should power off the BSC6900 only when required.
4.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases
This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in emergency cases. To ensure
the security of the BSC6900 cabinet, the BSC6900 cabinet must be powered off in emergency
cases, such as fire, smoke, or water immersion.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

4.1 Distribution of Power Switches


The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR provides 20 (10 x 2) routes of power outputs. This
section describes the mapping between the eight routes of power outputs from the power
distribution box of the MPR/EPR and the components in the cabinet.
The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR provides eight routes of power outputs in two
groups (group A and group B), which are controlled by switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10
respectively. Figure 4-1 shows the mapping between the power switches on the power
distribution box and the components in the MPR/EPR/TCR. Table 4-1 lists the mapping between
the power switches and the components.
Figure 4-1 Distribution of power switches on the power distribution box of the MPR/EPR

Table 4-1 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR/EPR

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Component

Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box

Subrack 2

A8, B8

Subrack 1

A9, B9

Subrack 0

A10, B10

Independent fan subrack

A7, B7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 Powering On/Off the BSC6900


NOTE

The independent fan subrack is configured in only the N68E-22 cabinet (controlled by power switches A7 and
B7).

4.2 Powering On the Cabinet


This section describes how to power on the BSC6900 cabinet and how to handle common power
failures in the components of the cabinet.

Prerequisites
l

The surface of the input power cables is not damaged. The input power cables are correctly
and securely connected.

The green and yellow PGND cable for the cabinet is properly connected.

The switches on the power distribution box are set to OFF.

CAUTION
Ensure that the Checking and Setting the Subrack DIP Switch operation is performed before the
cabinet is powered on. After the cabinet is powered on, any modification to the setting of a DIP
switch on a subrack does not take effect.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the switch that controls the BSC6900 power supply on the PDF to ON.
Step 2 When the RUN LED on the front panel of the power distribution box blinks every other 0.25s,
set the switches on the power distribution box to ON according to the actual requirements.
Step 3 Check the power supply to the cabinet components, as listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Checklist for the power supply to the cabinet components
Component

Normal LED Status

Board

The green RUN LED on the board panel blinks every


other second.

Fan box

The green STATUS LED on the panel of the fan box


blinks every other second after the subrack and
independent fan subrack are powered on.

Power distribution monitor board

The green RUN LED on the board panel blinks every


other second. The ALM LED is off.

Step 4 Power on the cabinet and then check the power supply to the components in the cabinet. Clear
the power failures, if any, according to Table 4-3.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

Table 4-3 Handling power failures in the components in the cabinet


Failure Type

Handling Measures

Power failure in all the internal


parts of the cabinet

Check whether the -48 V power cables and the RTN power
cables (DC Return) are properly connected.
l If the cable connection is wrong, set all the power
switches on the power distribution box to OFF, and then
reconnect the power cables.
CAUTION
Set the switches on the PDF to OFF before reconnecting the
power cables.

l If the cable connection is correct, replace the WOPB/


PAMU board (overvoltage protection board for the
power distribution box). If the failure persists, replace
the power distribution box.
Power failure in all the boards
in a subrack

Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the


subrack.
l If the input voltage is between -40 V and -57 V, replace
the subrack.
l If the input voltage is not between -40 V and -57 V, check
the connections of the power cables. If the connections
of the power cables are loose, set the switch on the power
distribution box corresponding to the subrack to OFF
and then reconnect the power cables. Otherwise, replace
the power distribution box because the switches on it
may be faulty.

Power failure in a certain board


in a subrack

Perform the following operations:


1. Check whether the board is securely connected. If the
board is not securely connected, reinstall the board and
observe the board indicator. For the status of the
indicators, refer to LEDs on the Boards.
2. Remove the board and check whether the pins in the
backplane socket of the slot are distorted, broken, or
missing. If the socket is damaged, replace the faulty
subrack.
3. Reinsert the board into the slot and observe the board
indicator. For the status of the indicators, refer to LEDs
on the Boards.
4. If the indicator does not function properly, remove the
board and insert it into a vacant slot that houses the same
type of board. Then, observe the indicator.
l If the board functions properly, it indicates that the
slot is faulty. Replace the subrack.
l If the fault persists, it indicates that the board is faulty.
Replace the board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

Failure Type

Handling Measures

Power failure in any other part


of the cabinet

Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the faulty


component.
l If the input voltage is between -40 V and -57 V, replace
the component.
l If the input voltage is not between -40 V and -57 V, check
the connections of power cables. If the connections of
the power cables are loose, set the switch on the power
distribution box corresponding to the component to OFF
and then reconnect the power cables. Otherwise, replace
the power distribution box because the switch on it may
be faulty.

----End

4.3 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation


This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation. You must
power off the BSC6900 cabinet when relocating the equipment or before a forecasted territorial
power blackout. Powering off the BSC6900 cabinet disrupts all the ongoing services. Therefore,
you should power off the BSC6900 only when required.

Prerequisites
l

The green and yellow PGND cable for the cabinet is properly connected.

Backing Up and Restoring the RAN System Data is complete on the BSC6900.

Context
To minimize the adverse impact on the BSC6900, power off the EPR before you power off the
MPR.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the power switches corresponding to the subracks configured in the EPR. Set the power
switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box to OFF in sequence.
Step 2 Power off the OMU board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

If...

Then...

The OMUa board is configured,

Flip open the ejector levers of the OMU


board.

If OMUc board is configured,

Press the PWRBTN button on the OMUc


board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 Powering On/Off the BSC6900


NOTE

Repeat this step if two OMUa boards are configured in the subrack. When you flip open the ejector levers,
the board automatically powers off the operating system and hard disks. Then, the OFFLINE LED on the
board is ON, which indicates that the board is powered off.

Step 3 After the OFFLINE LED on the OMU board is ON, set the power switches A7 to A10 and B7
to B10 on the power distribution box to OFF in sequence.
Step 4 Flip inwards the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position.
Step 5 Set the switches that control the power supply on the PDF to OFF.
----End

4.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases


This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in emergency cases. To ensure
the security of the BSC6900 cabinet, the BSC6900 cabinet must be powered off in emergency
cases, such as fire, smoke, or water immersion.

Procedure
Step 1 Set all the switches on the power distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet to OFF.
Step 2 If time permits, set the switches that control the power supply to the BSC6900 on the PDF to
OFF.
----End

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

5 Cleaning the Fan Box

Cleaning the Fan Box

This chapter describes how to clean a fan box. To ensure stability and reliability of the equipment,
the maintenance personnel should clean each fan box (including the fan boxes in the service
subracks and the fan boxes in the independent fan subrack) regularly, preferably once every
year.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, clean cotton cloth, ESD soft brush,
vacuum cleaner, and Phillips screwdriver.

A clean backup fan box is ready for use.

Context

CAUTION
l To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet.
If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
l Cleaning the fan box severely affects heat dissipation; therefore, you should replace the fan
box in less than one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged due to high temperature.

Procedure
Step 1 Clean the backup fan box by using a clean cotton cloth, an ESD soft brush, and a vacuum cleaner.
Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to open the front door of the cabinet and loosen the two captive screws
on the fan box.
Step 3 Remove the fan box from the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

5 Cleaning the Fan Box

DANGER
When replacing the fan box, do not put your hand inside the fan box. Otherwise, the revolving
fan blade may injure your fingers.
Step 4 Install the backup fan box into the cabinet and then fasten the captive screws to secure the fan
box.
Step 5 Clean the removed fan box with a clean cotton cloth, an ESD soft brush, and a vacuum cleaner.
After being cleaned, the fan box is reserved as a backup for future use.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to replace other fan boxes.
----End

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to clean and replace an air filter. The air filter protects the boards
and the BSC6900 from dust. If an air filter is damaged, you must replace it with a new one in
time.
6.1 Position of the Air Filters
This section describes the air filters in the BSC6900 cabinet. The air filters are installed on the
inner side of the front and rear doors and at the bottom of the cabinet. The installation position
of the air filters in the N68E-22 cabinet and in the N68E-21-N cabinet is different.
6.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22 Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the air filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet. The
maintenance personnel should clean the air filter at the bottom of each cabinet regularly,
preferably once every quarter.
6.3 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-21-N Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the air filter at the N68E-21-N cabinet bottom. The
maintenance personnel should clean the air filter at the bottom of each cabinet regularly,
preferably once every quarter.
6.4 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet Door
This describes how to clean the air filter on the inner side of the cabinet door. The maintenance
personnel should clean the air filter regularly, preferably once every quarter.
6.5 Replacing the Air Filters
This section describes how to replace a dirty and ineffective BSC6900 air filter. It takes about
five minutes to replace an air filter.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

6.1 Position of the Air Filters


This section describes the air filters in the BSC6900 cabinet. The air filters are installed on the
inner side of the front and rear doors and at the bottom of the cabinet. The installation position
of the air filters in the N68E-22 cabinet and in the N68E-21-N cabinet is different.

Air Filters in the N68E-22 Cabinet


Figure 6-1 shows the position of the air filters in the single-door N68E-22 cabinet. Figure
6-2 shows the position of the air filters in the double-door N68E-22 cabinet.
Figure 6-1 Air filters in the single-door N68E-22 cabinet

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

Figure 6-2 Air filters in the double-door N68E-22 cabinet

NOTE

The air filter at the bottom of the cabinet is white, and fixed on the rack with screws. The other filters are
black, and fixed on the cabinet with binding strips.

Air Filters Installed Inside the N68E-21-N Cabinet


Figure 6-3 shows the air filters in the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

Figure 6-3 Air filters installed in the N68E-21-N cabinet

NOTE

The air filter at the bottom of the cabinet is black, and fixed on the rack with screws. The other filters are
black, and fixed on the cabinet with binding strips.

6.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22


Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the air filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet. The
maintenance personnel should clean the air filter at the bottom of each cabinet regularly,
preferably once every quarter.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and cotton cloth.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front door of the cabinet and then remove the two screws from the air filter with a
Phillips screwdriver, as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Removing the air filter from the bottom of the cabinet

Step 2 Hold the panel of the air filter frame with both hands and lift the frame slightly to raise the panel
higher than the screws fixing the grounding cables at the bottom of the cabinet. Then, pull the
frame out of the cabinet slowly and completely.
Step 3 Clean the air filter with the cotton cloth.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

CAUTION
Do not clean an air filter with water, which may damage the air filter.
Step 4 Insert the clean air filter carefully along the guide rails into the cabinet. Do not push it forcibly.
Step 5 After the air filter is in position, fix the two screws on the air filter frame with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 Installing the air filter at the bottom of the cabinet

----End

6.3 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-21-N


Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the air filter at the N68E-21-N cabinet bottom. The
maintenance personnel should clean the air filter at the bottom of each cabinet regularly,
preferably once every quarter.

Prerequisites
The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and dry cleaning cloth.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front door of the cabinet. Then, remove the two screws from the air filter with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Removing the air filter from the cabinet bottom

Step 2 Hold the handle on the frame of the air filter and vertically lift the air filter slowly until it is
removed from the cabinet.
Step 3 Clean the air filter with the cotton cloth.

CAUTION
Do not clean an air filter with water, which may damage the air filter.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

Step 4 Insert with care the clean air filter along the guide rails into the cabinet, as shown in Figure
6-7.
Figure 6-7 Installing the air filter at the cabinet bottom

Step 5 After the air filter is in position, fasten the two screws on the air filter frame with the Phillips
screwdriver.
----End

6.4 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet
Door
This describes how to clean the air filter on the inner side of the cabinet door. The maintenance
personnel should clean the air filter regularly, preferably once every quarter.

Prerequisites
l

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap and cotton cloth that is dry and clean.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the door of the cabinet and strip off the black air filter from the inside of the door.
Step 2 Clean the air filter and the inside metal surface of the door with the clean cotton cloth.

CAUTION
Do not clean an air filter with water, which may damage the air filter.
Step 3 Stick the clean air filter along the edges of the inside of the door.

CAUTION
The air filter must be tightly stuck to the binding strips to avoid falling off. If the binding strips
fail to work, replace them with new ones.
----End

6.5 Replacing the Air Filters


This section describes how to replace a dirty and ineffective BSC6900 air filter. It takes about
five minutes to replace an air filter.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip and Phillips screwdriver.

A new air filters for the BSC6900 are ready.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the air filter from the cabinet.
If...

Then...

The air filter needs to be installed at the


bottom of the cabinet,

Loosen the retention screws with the Phillips


screwdriver and then remove the air filter.

The air filter is installed on the inner side Remove the air filter.
of the front door the back door,

Step 2 Install the new air filter.


If...

Then...

The air filter needs to be installed at the


bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet,

Install the air filter in the original position and


fasten the screws with the Phillips screwdriver.

The air filter needs to be installed at the


bottom of the N68E-21-N cabinet,

Insert the air filter along the guide rails and


tighten the screws with the Phillips screwdriver.

The air filter is installed on the inner side Stick the black air filter along the edges of the
of the front door the back door,
inner side of the door. Place the black air filter
along the edges of the inner side of the door.
Ensure that the edges of the air filter are tightly
attached to the black binding strips to prevent it
from falling off.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced air filter properly to prevent environmental pollution.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Replacing Boards and Modules

About This Chapter


This chapeter describes how to replace boards of the same hardware version and modules in the
BSC6900 cabinet, which involves replacing the boards and modules, acknowledging a
successful replacement, and handling of the faulty boards. Each section provides an estimated
time for the replacement of the board as a reference.

Context
Based on the board hardware versions before and after the operation, the operation can be divided
into the following two types:
l

Replacing a board with a board of the same hardware version, for example, replacing FG2a
board with FG2a board.

Replacing a board with a board of a later hardware version, for example, replacing FG2a
board with FG2c board.

For details about how to replace a board with a board of the same hardware version, see this
chapeter.
For details about how to replace one board with a board of a later hardware version, contact
Huawei engineers.
Capacity expansion design, board type combination are involved in the replacement operation.
It is highly recommended that contact the Huawei office engineer to replace a board with a board
of a later hardware version.
7.1 Procedure for Replacing a Board
This section describes the procedure for replacing a BSC6900 board.
7.2 Replacing an AEUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AEUa board. The AEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace the board.
7.3 Replacing an AOUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUa board. The AOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.4 Replacing an AOUc Board
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUc board. The AOUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.5 Replacing a DPUb/DPUe Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty DPUb/DPUe board. The DPUb/DPUe board is
hot-swappable. It takes about two minutes to replace the board.
7.6 Replacing an FG2a Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2a board. The FG2a board is hot swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.7 Replacing an FG2c Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2c board. The FG2c board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.8 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GCUa/GCGa board. The GCUa/GCGa board is
hot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.9 Replacing a GOUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUa board. The GOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.10 Replacing a GOUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUc board. The GOUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.11 Replacing a NIUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty NIUa board. The NIUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about two minutes to replace the board.
7.12 Replacing an OMU Board
This section describes how to replace an OMU board. A faulty OMU board needs to be replaced
to prevent data from being lost when OMU operation and maintenance are interrupted due to
disconnection between the OMU and host boards. For details about how to replace an OMU
board for other purposes, also see this section.
7.13 Replacing a PAMU Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty PAMU board. The PAMU board is hot-swappable.
It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.
7.14 Replacing a PEUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty PEUa board. The PEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace a PEUa board.
7.15 Replacing a POUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty POUa board. The POUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.16 Replacing a POUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty POUc board. The POUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.17 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SCUa/SCUb board. The SCUa/SCUb board is
hot-swappable. It takes about four minutes to replace the board.
7.18 Replacing a UOIa Board
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIa board. The UOIa board is hot swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.19 Replacing a UOIc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIc board. The UOIc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
7.20 Replacing an SPUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SPUa board. The SPUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.
7.21 Replacing an SPUb Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SPUb board. The SPUb board is hot-swappable.
It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.
7.22 Replacing a Subrack
This section describes how to replace a faulty BSC6900 subrack with a new BSC6900 subrack.
After 60 minutes from cutting off the power supply of a faulty subrack, a new subrack will start
working properly.
7.23 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack
When an independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 is faulty, the independent fan subrack must
be replaced. It takes about 15 minutes to replace an independent fan subrack.
7.24 Replacing the Power Distribution Box
This section describes how to replace a faulty power distribution box. It takes about 25 minutes
to replace a power distribution box.
7.25 Replacing the Fan Box
When a fan box in the service subrack or in the independent fan subrack is faulty, the fan box
must be replaced. You should finish the replacement of the fan box in less than one minute.
7.26 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module
This section describes how to replace a pluggable optical module when the module is faulty.
7.27 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner
This section describes how to replace an optical splitter/combiner. The BSC6900 optical
splitters/combiners are LC/LC-LC single-mode optical splitter/combiner and LC/LC-LC multimode optical splitter/combiner. It takes about five minutes to replace an optical splitter/
combiner.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

7.1 Procedure for Replacing a Board


This section describes the procedure for replacing a BSC6900 board.

7.1.1 Removing a Board


This section describes how to remove a BSC6900 board.

Prerequisites
The tools are ready, including the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree
cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

Context
All the boards in the BSC6900 cabinet, except the OMUa board, are hot-swappable. For other
principles of removing a board, see Precautions on Board Operation.

CAUTION
l The OMUa board can be hot-swappable only after the operating system is shut down.
l To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet.
If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
l

Removing a board (configuring the new ejector levers)


1.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Loosen the fastening screws on the board panel counterclockwise. Ensure that the
screws are fully detached from the subrack, as shown in parts A of Figure 7-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-1 Removing a board (configuring the new ejector levers)

2.

Press and hold the two locking buttons and turn the ejector levers on the board panels,
as shown in part B of Figure 7-1. The board is detached from the backplane, as shown
in part C of Figure 7-1.

3.

Hold the two ejector levers and pull the board along the guide rails, as shown in part
C of Figure 7-1.

CAUTION
Pull the board steadily without shaking the board to avoid damaging the pins on the
backplane or the board connector.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

4.

Pull the board out of the subrack by pulling the upper ejector lever on the front panel
with one hand and holding the bottom of the board by the other.

5.

Put the removed board in an ESD case or bag.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
While removing a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except for jumpers
and DIP switches.
l

Removing a board (configuring the old ejector levers)


1.

Loosen the fastening screws on the board panel counterclockwise. Ensure that the
screws are fully detached from the subrack, as shown in parts A of Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Removing a board (configuring the old ejector levers)

2.

Press the self-locking spring on the two ejector levers on the board panel, and at the
same time, turn the two ejector levers outwards, as shown in part B of Figure 7-2.
The board is detached from the backplane, as shown in part C of Figure 7-2.

3.

Hold the two ejector levers and pull the board along the guide rails, as shown in part
C of Figure 7-2.

CAUTION
Pull the board steadily without shaking the board to avoid damaging the pins on the
backplane or the board connector.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

4.

Pull the board out of the subrack by pulling the upper ejector lever on the front panel
with one hand and holding the bottom of the board by the other.

5.

Put the removed board in an ESD case or bag.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
While removing a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except for jumpers
and DIP switches.
----End

7.1.2 Inserting a Board


This section describes how to insert a BSC6900 board into the subrack.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready, including the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box or
bag.

A new board is ready and the DIP switches are correctly set.

Context

CAUTION
l You are required to wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD
connector of the cabinet before inserting a board.
l While inserting a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except the jumpers and
DIP switches with your bare hands.
For other principles of installing a BSC6900 board, see Precautions on Board Operation.

Procedure
l

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Inserting a Board (configuring the new ejector levers)


1.

Take the new board out of the ESD box. Then, check the pins and the sockets of the
board.
If there is any missing or broken pin, any bent ping or socket, contact Huawei engineers
for replacement.

2.

Press and hold the two locking buttons and turn the ejector levers on the board panels,
as shown in parts A of Figure 7-3. Turn the ejector lever into the position, as shown
in part B of Figure 7-3.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-3 Installing a BSC6900 board (configuring the new ejector levers)

3.

Hold the panel with one hand and the lower edge of the board with the other hand,
and then push the board into the subrack along the guide rails until the ejector levers
are half closed.

CAUTION
Push in the board slowly and steadily to avoid damage to the pins on the backplane
and the metal piece on the board.
4.

Lower the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown in part
C of Figure 7-3.

5.

Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 7-3.
NOTE

You need to push the screws inwards to secure the screws into the holes on the subrack.

Inserting a Board (configuring the old ejector levers)


1.

Take the new board out of the ESD box. Then, check the pins and the sockets of the
board.
If there is any missing or broken pin, any bent ping or socket, contact Huawei engineers
for replacement.

2.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Press the latch and turn the ejector lever outwards, as shown in parts A of Figure
7-4. Turn the ejector lever into the position, as shown in part B of Figure 7-4.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-4 Installing a BSC6900 board (configuring the old ejector levers)

3.

Hold the panel with one hand and the lower edge of the board with the other hand,
and then push the board into the subrack along the guide rails until the ejector levers
are half closed.

CAUTION
Push in the board slowly and steadily to avoid damage to the pins on the backplane
and the metal piece on the board.
4.

Lower the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown in part
C of Figure 7-4.

5.

Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of or Figure 7-4.
NOTE

You need to push the screws inwards to secure the screws into the holes on the subrack.

----End

7.2 Replacing an AEUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty AEUa board. The AEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace the board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box
or bag.

A new AEUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l Replacing the standby AEUa has no adverse effect on the system. When no standby AEUa
is in position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AEUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the AEUa board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AEUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 3.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to


standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
AEUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 4 Disconnect the clock cable (if configured). Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable
connector with a flat-head screwdriver and disconnect the E1/T1 cable.
Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the AEUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
If...

Then...

The settings are correct,

Go to Step 7.

The settings are incorrect,

1. Set the DIP switches correctly.


2. Go to Step 7.

Step 7 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Connect the E1/T1 cable and clock cable by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 11.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 11.


reported,
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 12.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.3 Replacing an AOUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUa board. The AOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new AOUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l Replacing the standby AOUa has no adverse effect on the system. If no standby AOUa is in
position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AOUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the AOUa board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AOUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Normal,

1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to


standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the AOUa
board to be replaced.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.


The optical port is active,

1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port


over to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS
(Manual Switchover from working link to protection
link).
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
AOUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the AOUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
If...

Then...

The settings are correct,

Go to Step 9.

The settings are incorrect,

1. Set the DIP switches correctly.


2. Go to Step 9.

Step 9 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 10 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 11 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 12 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 14.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 13.

Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 12.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 14.


reported,
Step 14 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 15.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 12.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 15 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

7.4 Replacing an AOUc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUc board. The AOUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new AOUc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l Replacing the standby AOUc has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the AOUc board
that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AOUc board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the AOUc board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AOUc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

CPU status is Normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the AOUc
board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.


The optical port is active,

1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port


to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS
(Manual Switchover from working link to protection
link).
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
AOUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and keep them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 13.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 12.

Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 13.


reported,
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 14.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.5 Replacing a DPUb/DPUe Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty DPUb/DPUe board. The DPUb/DPUe board is
hot-swappable. It takes about two minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box
or bag.

A new DPUb/DPUe board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
In the process of replacing the DPUb/DPUe board, logically inhibiting the board does not disrupt
the services carried on the dedicated channels. Removing the board, however, disrupts all the
services carried on the board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Logical inhibited board or Physical Go to Step 2.


inhibited board includes the DPUb/
DPUe board to be replaced.
Logical inhibited board or Physical 1. Run the INH DSP command to logically inhibit
the DSP on the board to be replaced.
inhibited board does not include the
DPUb/DPUe board to be replaced. 2. Run the INH BRD command to logically
inhibit the board.
3. Run the DSP UDSPRESOURCE command to
check the number of CS subscribers, number of all
types of subscribers, and number of cells and their
IDs carried on the DPUb/DPUe board. Based on
the check result, you can determine whether to
remove the board directly.
4. Go to Step 2.
NOTE
Logically inhibiting the DPUb/DPUe board prevents new
accesses from the board and reduces the impact of replacing
the board on the BSC6900 operation.

Step 2 Remove the DPUb/DPUe board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 3 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every alternate 0.125s.
Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

Go to Step 7.

CPU status is not Active normal,

Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Identify and rectify the fault according to the


alarm information.
2. Go to Step 5.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 7.


reported,

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 8.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that the
new board is functional.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.6 Replacing an FG2a Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2a board. The FG2a board is hot swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.

A new FG2a board is ready.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l If the FG2a board is standby and the data over the port on the FG2a board are backed up,
replacing the standby FG2a board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the FG2a boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby FG2a board disrupts part of services if the traffic over the ports exceeds
the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2a boards work in board backup
mode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2a board disrupts all the services
carried on the standby board.
l Replacing an FG2a board that works independently disrupts all the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the FG2a board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the FG2a board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2a board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2a board to be replaced.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2a
board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are standby, Go to Step 4.


The ports are active,

1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to switch the active port to


standby status.
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2a board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection after
replacing the board.
Step 5 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the replaced board.
Step 6 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Install the Ethernet cables by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 11.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 11.


reported,
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 12.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

7.7 Replacing an FG2c Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2c board. The FG2c board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.

A new FG2c board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l If the FG2c board is standby and the ports on the FG2c board are backed up, replacing the
standby FG2c board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the FG2c boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby FG2c board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2c boards work in
backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2c board disrupts all the
services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing an FG2c board that works independently disrupts all the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the FG2c board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the FG2c board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2c board to be replaced.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2c board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2c
board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are standby, Go to Step 4.


The ports are active,

1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to switch the active port to


standby status.
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2c board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection after
replacing the board.
Step 5 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the replaced board.
Step 6 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Install the Ethernet cables by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 11.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 11.


reported,
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 12.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.8 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty GCUa/GCGa board. The GCUa/GCGa board is
hot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.

A new GCUa/GCGa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
Replacing the standby GCUa/GCGa board has no adverse impact on the services in the system.
Replacing the GCUa/GCGa board that works independently, however, disrupts services carried
in the BSC6900.

Procedure
Step 1 Display the MPS in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check the configuration of the GCUa/GCGa
board.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Slots 12 and 13 are configured with the GCUa/GCGa boards,

Go to Step 2.

Slot 12 or 13 is configured with the GCUa/GCGa board,

Go to Step 3.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the GCUa/GCGa board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board
is replaced.
Step 4 Disconnect the cables from the faulty board.
Step 5 Remove the GCUa/GCGa board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 7 Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 8 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

If the CPU status of only one GCUa/GCGa board is Active normal, Go to Step 10.
If the CPU status of two GCUa/GCGa boards is Standby normal,

Go to Step 10.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 9.

Step 9 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 8.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 10.


reported,
Step 10 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 11.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 8.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 11 Run the DSP CLK command to query the clock status of the SCUa board in the MPS.
If...

Then...

If the clock status of the SCUa board is Normal,

The replacement is complete.

If the clock status of the SCUa board is Abnormal,

Go to Step 8.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.9 Replacing a GOUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUa board. The GOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new GOUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l If the GOUa board is standby and the data over the port on the GOUa board are backed up,
replacing the standby GOUa board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the GOUa boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby GOUa board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUa boards work in
board backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUa board disrupts all
the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOUa board that works independently disrupts the services on that board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the GOUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the GOUa board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUa
board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are standby, Go to Step 4.


The ports are active,

1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to switch the active port to


standby status.
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable connected to the GOUa are legible. If the labels
are illegible, attach a new label to the cable to avoid improper connection after the board is
replaced.
Step 5 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 6 Remove the board by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 11.

The CPU is in another status,

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 11.


reported,
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 12.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.10 Replacing a GOUc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUc board. The GOUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new GOUc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
l If the GOUc board is standby and the ports on the GOUc board are backed up, replacing the
standby GOUc board has no adverse effect on the system.
l When the GOUc boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby GOUc board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUc boards work in
backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUc board disrupts all the
services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOUc board that works independently disrupts the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the GOUc board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the GOUc board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUc
board to be replaced.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The ports are standby, Go to Step 4.


The ports are active,

1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to switch the active port to


standby status.
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cables connected to the GOUc board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board
is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 6 Remove the board by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and keep them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 11.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 11.


reported,
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 12.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.11 Replacing a NIUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty NIUa board. The NIUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about two minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box
or bag.

A new NIUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.
If...

Then...

The query result of Logical INH Status or Go to Step 2.


Physical INH Status includes the NIUa
board to be replaced.
The query result of Logical INH Status 1. Run the INH BRD command to physically
inhibit the board.
and Physical INH Status does not include
the NIUa board to be replaced.
2. Go to Step 2.
Step 2 Remove the NIUa board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 3 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every alternate 0.125s.
Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

Go to Step 7.

CPU status is not Active normal,

Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Identify and rectify the fault according to the


alarm information.
2. Go to Step 5.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 7.


reported,
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 8.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that the
new board is functional.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

7.12 Replacing an OMU Board


This section describes how to replace an OMU board. A faulty OMU board needs to be replaced
to prevent data from being lost when OMU operation and maintenance are interrupted due to
disconnection between the OMU and host boards. For details about how to replace an OMU
board for other purposes, also see this section.

Prerequisites
l

The tools required for replacing an OMU board are prepared: an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips
screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, a wrench, and an ESD box or bag.

A new OMU board is prepared.

The following installation information about the OMU board to be replaced is obtained:
FTP server password
Administrator password
Operating system (OS) type of the OMU board
Information about all IP addresses of the OMU board, including external fixed IP
address (external gateway IP address), external virtual IP address, internal fixed IP
address, internal virtual IP address, backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs, and debugging IP address.

The version software required for installing the new OMU board is obtained. A
Dopra_Linux_U tool, Suse Linux OS installation disk, or Windows 2003 OS installation
disk is prepared for a new OMU board whose OS is Dopra Linux, Suse Linux, and Windows
2003 respectively.
NOTE

l Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version


Software > Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > MBSC > BSC6900 > BSC6900 Product
Version > BSC6900 Software Version.
l Click Software Version VER to obtain the BSC6900 version installation package.
l Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version
Software > Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to obtain the
Dopra_Linux_USB Disks.

Context
Figure 7-5 shows the procedure for replacing an OMU board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-5 Procedure for replacing an OMU board

7.12.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU Board


This section describes how to check OMU status before replacing an OMU board. To ensure
OMU data consistency before and after a replacement, users need to check the status of the OMU
board to be replaced before a replacement. Users need to query and record the OMU board
information, active or standby state, and data synchronization status.

Prerequisites
l

The OMU board to be replaced is not faulty and can perform operation and maintenance
functions.

Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot perform operation and maintenance
functions, skip the task in this section. Obtain the latest OMU system backup data and replace
the OMU board by referring to 7.12.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU
Mode, 7.12.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode, or 7.12.5
Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-System Mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Check and record the OMU routing function status of the OMU board to be replaced.
1.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Log in to the OMU as a root user.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

2.

Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to go to the


directory where the ip_forward.sh script is saved.

3.

Enter the chmod +x root_login.sh command and press Enter to make the
ip_forward.sh script excutable.

4.

Enter the ./ip_forward.sh status command and press Enter to query the status of OMU
route forwarding.
NOTE

Parameter description
l Configuration status indicates the status of OMU route forwarding to be configured.
l Actual status indicates the current status of OMU route forwarding.
l enabled indicates that OMU route forwarding is enabled. disabled indicates that OMU route
forwarding is disabled.

Step 2 Optional: When the OMU board is an OMUc board, users need to check and record the Forbid
User Root to Log In status of the OMU board to be replaced.
Option

Description

Log in as a common user 1. Log in to the OMU as a non-root user.


2. Enter the command su and press Enter
3. Enter the root user password and press Enter to switch the user
account from a non-root to root user.
4. Log in to the OMU as a root user.
5. Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and
press Enter to swith the current directory to the directory
where the root_login.sh script is saved.
6. Enter the chmod +x root_login.sh command and press
Enter to make the root_login.sh script executable.
7. Enter the ./root_login.sh status command and press Enter to
query the status of the root user remote login.
Log in as the user root

1. Log in to the OMU as a root user.


2. Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and
press Enter to swith the current directory to the directory
where the root_login.sh script is saved.
3. Enter the chmod +x root_login.sh command and press
Enter to make the root_login.sh script executable.
4. Enter the ./root_login.sh status command and press Enter to
query the status of the root user remote login.

NOTE

Parameter description:
l Configuration status specifies the status that the user root needs to be set to.
l Actual status means the status of the user root.
l enabled means that the user root is allowed to log in to the OMU. disabled means that the user root is
forbidden to log in to the OMU.
l If the returned result is The script does not support this system!, the operating system of the OMUc board
does not support the Forbid User Root function.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 3 Log in to the LMT by referring to Log in to the LMT.


Step 4 Check consistency in the configuration data, version software, and license.
1.

Run the MML command ACT CRC to check whether the configuration data of all
BSC6900 host boards and the OMU board is consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the data is consistent.

2.

Run the MML command CMP BRDVER to check whether the running versions of all
BSC6900 host boards and the OMU board are consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the versions are consistent.

3.

Run the MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the licenses of all BSC6900
host boards and the OMU board are consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the licenses are consistent.
NOTE

l If the configuration data is inconsistent, resolve it by referring to the handling suggestions in ALM-20736
Data Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
l If the software versions are inconsistent, resolve it by referring to ALM-20733 Software Version
Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
l If the licenses are inconsistent, resolve it by referring to ALM-20734 License Inconsistency Between OMU
and Host.

Step 5 Run the MML command LST VER. Query and record the value of OS type.
Step 6 Run the MML command LST TZ. Query and record the time zone and daylight saving
time.
Step 7 Run the MML command LST MBSCMODE. Query and record the OMU mode.
Step 8 Query and record the external gateway IP address of the OMU board to be replaced.
Option

Description

If the OMU OS is Dopra Linux or Suse 1. Log in to the OMU by referring to Logging In
to the OMU.
Linux
2. Enter the command route and press Enter.
Query and record the value of Gateway whose
Destination is set to default.
If the OMU OS is Windows

1. Log in to the OMU by referring to Logging In


to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press
Enter to enter the OMU command mode.
3. Enter the command ipconfig and press Enter.
Query and record the value of Default
Gateway corresponding to External Network
Team.

Step 9 Query the information about the OMU board to be replaced.


l When the board is OMUa board, run the MML command DSP OMU, and record the
information in Table 7-1.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-1 OMU board status information table


Item

Setting information example

Computer name

OMU_21

Internal network fixed IP

80.168.3.50

External network fixed IP

10.168.172.2

Backup network IP

192.168.3.50

Operational state

Active normal

Version

XXXXXX

External network virtual IP

10.168.192.5

External network virtual IP mask

255.255.254.0

Internal network virtual IP

80.168.3.40

Internal network virtual IP mask

255.0.0.0

Data-sync state

Normal

l When the board is OMUc board, run the DSP OMU and record in Table 7-2. The Backup
network IP is based on the following:
Run the ifconfig bond3 command to query the backup network IP of B_UPDATE0.
Run the ifconfig bond4 command to query the backup network IP of B_UPDATE1.
Table 7-2 OMU board status information table

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Item

Setting information example

Computer name

OMU_21

Internal network fixed IP

80.168.3.50

External network fixed IP

10.168.172.2

Backup network IP of B_UPDATE0

192.168.9.50

Backup network IP of B_UPDATE1

192.168.3.50

Operational state

Active normal

Version

XXXXXX

External network virtual IP

10.168.192.5

External network virtual IP mask

255.255.254.0

Internal network virtual IP

80.168.3.40

Internal network virtual IP mask

255.0.0.0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Item

Setting information example

Data-sync state

Normal

NOTE

l If only one OMU board is configured, Data-sync state is not included in the queried information.
l Query and record the debugging IP address of the OMU board to be replaced.
l If the OMU operating system is Dopra Linux, log in to the OMU and execute ifconfig bond2 to query
the debugging IP address.
l If the OMU operating system is Suse Linux, log in to the OMU and execute ifconfig eth2 to query the
debugging IP address.
l If the OMU operating system is Windows, log in to the OMU and query the debugging IP address
configured in Eth2 properties of Network Connections.

If...

Then...

The MPS is configured with two OMU


boards

Perform operations described in Step 10.

The MPS is configured with one OMU


board

Perform operations described in 7.12.2


Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in
Single-OMU Mode.

Step 10 Run the MML command DSP OMUMODULE to query the status of the OMU processes.
If...

Then...

State is Active or Stopped

Perform operations described in Step 11.

State is Abnormal

Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 11 Check whether the OMU board to be replaced is active or on standby.


If...

Then...

The board is in Standby normal state Perform operations described in 7.12.3


Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in
Dual-System Mode.
The board is in Active normal state

Perform operations described in Step 12.

Step 12 Based on Data-sync state queried in Step 9, do as follows:

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Data-sync state is not Data


synchronization is successful

Clear alarms by referring to ALM-20701


OMU Failure Switchover and ALM-20704
OMU Data Synchronization Failure. Go to
Step 13 after the alarms are cleared.

Data-sync state is Data synchronization Perform operations described in Step 13.


is successful
Step 13 Run the MML command SWP OMU to manually switch over the active and standby OMU
boards. Wait 5 minutes, and run the DSP OMU command to check that the OMU board to be
replaced is in the standby state and Data-sync state is set to Data synchronization is
successful. Replace the OMU board by referring to 7.12.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby
OMU in Dual-System Mode.
----End

7.12.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU Mode


This section describes how to replace an OMU board when only one OMU is configured on
BSC6900. In this scenario, OMU operation and maintenance of the host boards are interrupted.

Context
l

Replacing an OMU board in single-OMU mode will disconnect the OMU board from the
host boards and interrupt OMU operation and maintenance. System running data during
this period of time will be lost.

Replacing an OMU board in single-OMU mode occurs in one the following scenarios:

Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same OS


This section describes how to replace an OMU board of a BSC6900 configured with only one
OMU board when the OMU board to be replaced and the new OMU board run the same operating
system (OS).

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.


1.

Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In
this step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

3.

Optional: Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers
1.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert a new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.
Unscrew the captive screws on the OMU board counterclockwise, as shown in part A
of Figure 7-6.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-6 Removing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers

NOTE

The preceding figure takes an OMUa board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc board
is similar.

2.
3.
4.

5.

6.

7.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Optional: If the board is an OMUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.
Press and hold the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers on the OMU
board panel to unlock them, as shown in part B of Figure 7-6.
Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if
configured) from the OMU board after the OFFLINE LED flashes fast and then is
steady blue.
Fully rotate the ejector levers outwards of the OMU board to separate it from the
backplane. Remove the OMU board along the guide rails, as shown in part C of Figure
7-6.
Press and hold the two locking buttons of the new board, flip outward the ejector levers
to separate them from the self-locking latch, and rotate them until they cannot be
rotated, as shown in part A of Figure 7-7.
Slide the new board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in part B of Figure
7-7.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-7 Installing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers

NOTE

l The preceding figure takes an OMUa board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc
board is similar.
l The OMUa board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS
at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
l The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the
MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

8.

Flip inward the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown
in part C of Figure 7-7.

9.

Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 7-7.
The new board automatically loads software and configuration data, and the RUN
LED blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.

10. Connect the cables by referring to the labels.


l

Optional: Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers
1.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Unscrew the captive screws on the OMU board counterclockwise, as shown in part A
of Figure 7-8.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-8 Removing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

NOTE

The preceding figure takes an OMUa board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc board
is similar.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

2.

Optional: If the board is an OMUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.

3.

Flip outward the ejector levers of the OMU board, as shown in part B of Figure 7-8.

4.

Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if
configured) from the OMU board after the OFFLINE LED flashes fast and then is
steady blue.

5.

Fully rotate the ejector levers outwards of the OMU board to separate it from the
backplane. Remove the OMU board along the guide rails, as shown in part C of Figure
7-8.

6.

Flip outward the ejector levers of the new OMU board, as shown in part A of Figure
7-9.

7.

Slide the new board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in part B of Figure
7-9.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-9 Installing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

NOTE

l The preceding figure takes an OMUa board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc
board is similar.
l The OMUa board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS
at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
l The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the
MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

8.

Flip inward the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown
in part C of Figure 7-9.

9.

Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 7-9.
The new board automatically loads software and configuration data, and the RUN
LED blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.

10. Connect the cables by referring to the labels.


l

Install OMU applications and change IP addresses of the new OMU.


1.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Install OMU applications as instructed in Table 7-3.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-3 Criteria for operations (1)


If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux or Suse
Linux

1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new


OMU board.
NOTE
If the new OMU board is installed with the OMU applications,
perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an
earlier version.
If the new OMU board is not installed with the OMU
applicaitons, skip this step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed


IP address.
b. Stop the omud by referring to Stopping the omud.
c. Enter uninstall_bam under any directory of the
OMU and press Enter.
d. The message Uninstall standby area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to
uninstall the OMU applications on the standby
workspace of the standby OMU.
e. Enter the uninstall_bam command and press
Enter.
f. The message Uninstall main area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to
uninstall the OMU applications on the active
workspace of the standby OMU.
2. Install OMU applications as instructed in Install OMU
applications of Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse
Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Windows

1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new


OMU board.
NOTE
If the new OMU board is installed with the OMU applications,
perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an
earlier version.
If the new OMU board is not installed with the OMU
applicaitons, skip this step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed


IP address.
b. Stop the omud by referring to Stopping the omud.
c. Click Start > Run and the Run dialog box is
displayed.
d. In the Run dialog box, type the uninstall_bam
command and click OK.
e. Type Y and press Enter. When the uninstallation is
complete, the message, Uninstall OMU succeed!
is displayed on the interface.
f. Go to 4 after uninstalling the OMU applications in
the standby workspace. Perform to 5 uninstall the
OMU applications in the active workspace. This
task is completed.
2. Install OMU applications as instructed in Install OMU
applications of Scenario: Old OMU Running
Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
2.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Change IP addresses of the new OMU so that they match those of the replaced OMU
board, as instructed in Table 7-4.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-4 Criteria for operations (2)


If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux

1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/


bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is
used to change the fixed internal IP address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is
used to change the virtual internal IP address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) command is used to change the fixed
external IP address and mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway) command is used to change the virtual
external IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
l Use the command ./omutool
backupcard_for_omuc IP address to change the
backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet adapter on an
OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool
backupcard_for_omua IP address to change the
backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet adapter on an
OMUc board.
l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to
change the debugging IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press


Enter to start the omud process.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is Suse


Linux

1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/


version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is
used to change the fixed internal IP address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is
used to change the virtual internal IP address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) command is used to change the fixed
external IP address and mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway) command is used to change the virtual
external IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to
change the debugging IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press


Enter to start the omud process.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Windows

1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to


enter the OMU command mode.
2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin
\bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing omutool.
3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l The omutool innercard IP address command is
used to change the fixed internal IP address.
l The omutool innervip IP address command is used
to change the virtual internal IP address.
l The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask
(gateway IP address) command is used to change
the fixed external IP address and subnet mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway IP address) command is used to change
the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
l The omutool debugcard IP address command is
used to change the debugging IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.

4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud


progress.
3.
l

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive as shown in Table
7-5.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-5 Criteria for operations (3)


If...

Then...

The OMU OS is Suse


Linux

Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose


Software Center > Version Software > Wireless Product
Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the
OMU Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide
to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver
upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU
O&M Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter
driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.

The OMU OS is
Windows

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU


Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rarfile from the release document. Decompress the package
and obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating
System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Restore OMU data.


1.

Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.

2.

Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

3.

Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.

4.

Perform operations described in Table 7-6 based on the OMU OS type.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-6 Criteria for operations (4)


If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux

1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP


address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press
Enter to stop the omud process.
3. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services
and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
the omu_backup_linker tool.
4. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
backup file pathname : ." Type the backup
file save path and the file name and press Enter. The
system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure. For example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
7. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press
Enter to start the omud process.

The OMU OS is Suse


Linux

1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP


address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press
Enter to stop the omud process.
3. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/
common/services and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
4. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
backup file pathname : ." Type the backup
file save path and the file name and press Enter. The
system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure. For example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
7. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press
Enter to start the omud process.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Windows

1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP


address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to
enter the OMU command mode.
3. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud
progress.
4. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common
\services and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. Type the backup file save path and the file name and
press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure.
For example, "Restore OMU database
succeed!" may be displayed.
8. Type the command net start omud to start the omud
progress.

Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Board Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board Running
Suse Linux/Windows
This section describes how to replace an OMU board of a BSC6900 configured with only one
OMU board when the OMU board to be replaced runs the Dopra Linux operating system (OS)
and the new OMU board runs the Suse Linux/Windows OS.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing the USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS
but directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMU
applications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same
OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.


1.

Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In
this step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert a new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an
OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

Use the USB installation disk to switch the OMU OS and install OMU applications.
1.

Optional: Ensure that the BIOS boot sequence of the OMU board is set to boot from
the USB disk. For detailed operations, see Setting the 1st Boot Device of the OMU to
USB.

2.

Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.

3.

Remove and insert the OMU board to reset it.


NOTE

After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

4.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 7-7.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status. See Table 7-8.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system
installation, see Table 1 in Preparing the USB Storage Device.

Table 7-7 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed
Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Table 7-8 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system and OMU applications installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed
Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or
off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or
off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

l When using an USB installation disk with the operation type set to Install, you must restore the
OMU data.
l When using an USB installation disk with the operation type set to Switch, you do not need to
restore the OMU data.

Restore OMU data.


1.

Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

2.

Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.

3.

Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.

4.

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.

5.

Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to


the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

6.

Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the


omu_backup_linker tool.

7.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type


restore and press Enter.

8.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file


pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

9.

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the OMU on BSC6900 with a single OMU when the
operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Suse Linux and that on the new OMU is Dopra
Linux.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS
but directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMU
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

applications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same
OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.


1.

Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In
this step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Install Suse Linux.


1.

On the LMT PC, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation source for Suse Linux. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating
Operating System Installation Source.

2.

Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on each of the new OMUs.

3.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

4.

Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

Install OMU applications.


1.

Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.

2.

Connect to the debugging port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU through the
commissioning IP address. For details, see Uploading the OMU Application
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Installation Package to the OMU. (The file upload path is /BSC6000/data/mbsc/


upgrade.)
3.

Use the commissioning IP address to switch to the directory where the installation
package is saved. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
If the operating system is Dopra Linux, assume that OMU applications installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/
setup. Enter the following command and press Enter.
cd /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

If the operating system is Suse Linux, assume that OMU applications installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/
VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and press
Enter.
cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

4.

Run the chmod +x ./install_bam.sh command to acquire the authority to run the ./
install_bam.sh command.

5.

Type the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you to
enter the product mode, as shown in the following figure.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE

The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are installed automatically,
because they can be installed only if the check passes.

6.

Type the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the
office name, as shown in the following figure.
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

7.

Type the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the language,
as shown in the following figure.
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

8.

Type the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the admin
password, as shown in the following figure.
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only
letters and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
NOTE

The admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.

9.

Type the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the FTP
password, as shown in the following figure.
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


letters and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
NOTE

The FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can access
the FTP service with the FTP password.

10. Type the FTP password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the external
virtual IP address, as shown in the following figure.
# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

11. Type the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter
the OMU system type, as shown in the following figure.
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single:Install stand-alone system
# Dual:Install dual-OMU system.
The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU
system.
Please input a valid install_type :

12. Type the OMU system type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 7-9 Description
Parameter

Description

Single

When the BSC6900 is configured with


one OMU board, install the OMU
applications on the board in singleOMU mode.

Dual

When the BSC6900 is configured with


two OMU boards, install the OMU
applications on the boards in dual-OMU
mode.

13. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown in the
following figure.
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

14. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the message"Install OMU
succeed!" is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.
l

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the replaced OMUs.
1.

Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press


Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.

2.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal
IP address.
The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal
IP address.
The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change
the fixed external IP address and mask.
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway) command is used to
change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa board.
The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the debugging IP address.
NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

3.

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

4.

Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive. Log in to http://
support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version Software >
Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU Driver
Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver
and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M
Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE

Suse Linux has no operation system patch.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Recover the OMU data.


1.

Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.

2.

Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

3.

Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.

4.

Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.

5.

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.

6.

Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/services and press


Enter to navigate to the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

7.

Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the


omu_backup_linker tool.

8.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type


restore and press Enter.

9.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file


pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

10. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
l

Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the OMU on BSC6900 with a single OMU when the
operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Windows and that on the new OMU is Dopra
Linux.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS
but directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMU
applications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same
OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.


1.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In
this step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

Install Windows.
1.

On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare a Windows installation source. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System, Creating
Operating System Installation Source, and Creating the Installation Source of the
SetWin Software and OS Patches.

2.

Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on the new OMU.

3.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

4.

Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

Install OMU applications.


1.

Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.

2.

Upload OMU applications to the OMU.


a.

(Optional) If patches are installed during the installation, delete the original patch
files saved in the patch folder for OMU applications, copy the patches (for
example, the V900R01XC0XSPCXXX folder) saved on the local computer to
the patch folder for OMU applications.
Figure 7-10 show the directory structures of the patche installation package.
Figure 7-10 Directory structure of the patche installation package

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

b.

Connect to the debugging Ethernet port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU
through the commissioning IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.

c.

Under drive D on the OMU, create the \mbsc\upgrade folder, right-click it, and
choose Sharing and Security.

d.

In the Properties dialog box, select Share this folder, set the read/write property,
and then click OK.

e.

On the local computer, choose Start > Run, enter \\OMU commissioning IP
address. In the displayed dialog box, enter the username and password, and click
OK.

f.

Copy OMU applications installation package from the local computer to the
\mbsc\upgrade folder on the OMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

3.

Go to the V***R***C**\install\setup directory of the version installation package


and double-click install_bam.bat. The system prompts you to enter the product
running mode, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

V***R***C** is an example of the version installation package. During installation, see the actual
version.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE

The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are installed automatically,
because they can be installed only if the check passes.

4.

Type the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter
the NE name, as shown in the following figure.
# The name of office
# The name must range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The first character must be a letter and the subsequent characters can
be lett
ers, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

5.

Type the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter a language,
as shown in the following figure.
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

6.

Type the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the admin
password, as shown in the following figure.
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only
letters an
d figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

7.

Type the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the FTP
password, as shown in the following figure.
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only
letters a
nd figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

8.

Type the ftp password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the external
virtual IP address, as shown in the following figure.
# The virtual extranet ip.
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

9.

Type the virtual IP address of the external network and press Enter. The system
prompts you to enter the type of installing the OMU applications, as shown in the
following figure.
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single : Install stand-alone system
# Dual
: Install dual system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently
increase the reliability of the OMU system
Please input a valid install_type :

10. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.
Table 7-10 Description
Parameter

Description

Single

When the BSC6900 is configured with


one OMU board, install the OMU
applications on the board in singleOMU mode.

Dual

When the BSC6900 is configured with


two OMU boards, install the OMU
applications on the boards in dual-OMU
mode.

11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown in the
following figure.
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

12. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the message "Install OMU
succeed!" is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.
l

Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
1.

Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.

2.

Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter to


navigate to the directory containing omutool.

3.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
The omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal
IP address.
The omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal
IP address.
The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command
is used to change the fixed external IP address and subnet mask.
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command
is used to change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa board.
The omutool debugcard IP address command is used to change the debugging
IP address.
NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

4.

Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.

5.

Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rar file from the release document. Obtain the Upgrade
Guide to OMU Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Recover the OMU data.


1.

Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.

2.

Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

3.

Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.

4.

Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.

5.

Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud progress.

6.

Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and press Enter to


navigate to the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

7.

Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press Enter to start the


omu_backup_linker tool.

8.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type


restore and press Enter.

9.

Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter. The system starts
to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or failure. For example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

10. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
l

Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

7.12.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode


This section describes how to replace the standby OMU board when two OMUs are configured
on BSC6900.

Context
l

The new OMUs can use the same operating system as the OMUs to be replaced or use
another operating system, but the active and standby OMUs must use the same operating
system.

The new OMUs must be of the same type as the OMUs to be replaced.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

In dual-system mode, if the active OMU fails, the system automatically performs a
switchover. Therefore, only the standby OMU needs to be replaced.

Replacing the standby OMU board in dual-system mode occurs in one the following scenarios:

Scenario: Old and New OMUs Running the Same Operating System
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUs
when the OMU to be replaced and the new OMU have the same operating system.

Prerequisites
l

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the active
OMU and the standby one.
Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronization
between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
Step 3 Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the command
mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.
Step 4 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is configured with old ejector levers.
Step 5 Perform operations in Table 7-11 based on the operating system.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-11 Criteria for operations (1)


If...

Then...

The OMU operating


system is Dopra Linux
or Suse Linux

1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new OMU


board.
NOTE
If OMU applications have been installed on the new OMU board,
perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an earlier
version.
If no OMU application is installed on the new OMU board, skip this
step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external IP


address or the debugging IP address by referring to Logging
In to the OMU.
b. Stop the omud by referring to Stopping the omud.
c. Enter uninstall_bam under any directory of the OMU and
press Enter.
d. The message Uninstall standby area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to uninstall
the OMU applications on the standby workspace of the
standby OMU.
e. Enter the uninstall_bam command and press Enter.
f. The message Uninstall main area. input Y to continue;
input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to uninstall the OMU
applications on the active workspace of the standby OMU.
2. Install OMU applications. For details, see Install OMU
applications. in Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux
and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
3. Change the IP addresses of the new OMU.
l The OMU operating system is Suse Linux, refer to Change
the IP addresses of the new OMU to those of the OMU
to be replaced.
l The OMU operating system is Dopra Linux
a. Type the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command
and press Enter to go to the directory where the omutool
program is saved.
b. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
The ./omutool innercard IP address command is
used to change the fixed internal IP address.
The ./omutool innervip IP address command is
used to change the virtual internal IP address.
The ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) command is used to change the fixed
external IP address and mask.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

If...

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Then...
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway) command is used to change the virtual
external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to
change the debugging IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.

4. Install the operating system patch and upgrade Ethernet adapter


driver when the operating system is Suse Linux. Log in to
http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software
Center > Version Software > Wireless Product Line >
SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU
Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to
OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver upgrade
tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M
Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU operating


system is Windows

1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new OMU


board.
NOTE
If OMU applications have been installed on the new OMU board,
perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an earlier
version.
If no OMU application is installed on the new OMU board, skip this
step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the standby OMU through the external fixed IP


address by referring to Logging In to the OMU.
b. Stop the omud by referring to Stopping the omud.
c. Click Start > Run and the Run dialog box is displayed.
d. In the Run dialog box, type the uninstall_bam command
and click OK.
e. Type Y and press Enter. When the uninstallation is
complete, the message, Uninstall OMU succeed! is
displayed on the interface.
f. Go to 4 after uninstalling the OMU applications in the
standby workspace. Perform to 5 to uninstall the OMU
applications in the active workspace. This task is
completed.
2. Install OMU applications. For details, see Install OMU
applications in Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and
New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
3. Change the IP addresses of the new OMU board. For details,
see Change the IP addresses of the new OMU to those of
the OMU to be replaced in Scenario: Old OMU Running
Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
4. Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU
Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rarfile from the release document. Decompress the package
and obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating
System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Step 6 Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.


----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Running Suse Linux/
Windows
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is Dopra Linux and that on the new
OMUs is Suse Linux/Windows.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing the USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit.

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the active
OMU and the standby one.
Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronization
between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
Step 3 Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the command
mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.
Step 4 Connect a USB installation disk to a USB port on the new OMU.
Step 5 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is configured with old ejector levers.
Step 6 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Check
the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating system
is installed successfully.
l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See
Table 7-12.
l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 7-13.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,
prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flash
drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system installation, see
Table 1 in Preparing the USB Storage Device.

Table 7-12 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system
installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 7-13 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system and
OMU applications installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Step 7 Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.


----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is Suse Linux and that on the new OMUs
is Dopra Linux.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit.

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Stop the synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one and the omud
serviece.
1.

Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the
active OMU and the standby one.

2.

Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the
synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.

3.

Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the
command mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.

Install Suse Linux.


1.

On the LMT PC, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation source for Suse Linux. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating
Operating System Installation Source.

2.

Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on each of the new OMUs.

3.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

4.

Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

Install OMU applications.


1.

Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.

2.

Connect to the debugging port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU through the
commissioning IP address. For details, see Uploading the OMU Application
Installation Package to the OMU. (The file upload path is /BSC6000/data/mbsc/
upgrade.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

3.

Use the commissioning IP address to switch to the directory where the installation
package is saved. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
If the operating system is Dopra Linux, assume that OMU applications installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/
setup. Enter the following command and press Enter.
cd /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

If the operating system is Suse Linux, assume that OMU applications installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/
VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and press
Enter.
cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

4.

Run the chmod +x ./install_bam.sh command to acquire the authority to run the ./
install_bam.sh command.

5.

Type the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you to
enter the product mode, as shown in the following figure.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE

The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are installed automatically,
because they can be installed only if the check passes.

6.

Type the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the
office name, as shown in the following figure.
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

7.

Type the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the language,
as shown in the following figure.
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

8.

Type the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the admin
password, as shown in the following figure.
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only
letters and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
NOTE

The admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.

9.

Type the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the FTP
password, as shown in the following figure.
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only
letters and figures.
# Do not forget the password.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
NOTE

The FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can access
the FTP service with the FTP password.

10. Type the FTP password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the external
virtual IP address, as shown in the following figure.
# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

11. Type the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter
the OMU system type, as shown in the following figure.
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single:Install stand-alone system
# Dual:Install dual-OMU system.
The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU
system.
Please input a valid install_type :

12. Type the OMU system type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 7-14 Description
Parameter

Description

Single

When the BSC6900 is configured with


one OMU board, install the OMU
applications on the board in singleOMU mode.

Dual

When the BSC6900 is configured with


two OMU boards, install the OMU
applications on the boards in dual-OMU
mode.

13. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown in the
following figure.
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

14. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the message"Install OMU
succeed!" is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.
l

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
1.

Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press


Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.

2.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal
IP address.
The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal
IP address.
The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change
the fixed external IP address and mask.
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway) command is used to
change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa board.
The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the debugging IP address.
NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

3.
l

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

Install the operating system patch and upgrade the adapter driver.Log in to http://
support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version Software >
Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU Driver
Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver
and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M
Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE

Suse Linux has no operating system patch.

Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Windows and that on the new OMU
is Dopra Linux.

Prerequisites
l

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This takes care of the user operation habit.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Stop the synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one and the omud
serviece.
1.

Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the
active OMU and the standby one.

2.

Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the
synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.

3.

Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the
command mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.

Install Windows.
1.

On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare a Windows installation source. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System, Creating
Operating System Installation Source, and Creating the Installation Source of the
SetWin Software and OS Patches.

2.

Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on the new OMU.

3.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

4.

Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

Install OMU applications.


1.

Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.

2.

Upload OMU applications to the OMU.


a.

(Optional) If patches are installed during the installation, delete the original patch
files saved in the patch folder for OMU applications, copy the patches (for
example, the V900R01XC0XSPCXXX folder) saved on the local computer to
the patch folder for OMU applications.
Figure 7-11 show the directory structures of the patche installation package.
Figure 7-11 Directory structure of the patche installation package

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

3.

b.

Connect to the debugging Ethernet port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU
through the commissioning IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.

c.

Under drive D on the OMU, create the \mbsc\upgrade folder, right-click it, and
choose Sharing and Security.

d.

In the Properties dialog box, select Share this folder, set the read/write property,
and then click OK.

e.

On the local computer, choose Start > Run, enter \\OMU commissioning IP
address. In the displayed dialog box, enter the username and password, and click
OK.

f.

Copy OMU applications installation package from the local computer to the
\mbsc\upgrade folder on the OMU.

Go to the V***R***C**\install\setup directory of the version installation package


and double-click install_bam.bat. The system prompts you to enter the product
running mode, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

V***R***C** is an example of the version installation package. During installation, see the actual
version.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE

The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are installed automatically,
because they can be installed only if the check passes.

4.

Type the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter
the NE name, as shown in the following figure.
# The name of office
# The name must range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The first character must be a letter and the subsequent characters can
be lett
ers, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

5.

Type the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter a language,
as shown in the following figure.
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

6.

Type the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the admin
password, as shown in the following figure.
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only
letters an
d figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

7.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Type the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the FTP
password, as shown in the following figure.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only
letters a
nd figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

8.

Type the ftp password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the external
virtual IP address, as shown in the following figure.
# The virtual extranet ip.
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :
NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

9.

Type the virtual IP address of the external network and press Enter. The system
prompts you to enter the type of installing the OMU applications, as shown in the
following figure.
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single : Install stand-alone system
# Dual
: Install dual system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently
increase the reliability of the OMU system
Please input a valid install_type :

10. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.
Table 7-15 Description
Parameter

Description

Single

When the BSC6900 is configured with


one OMU board, install the OMU
applications on the board in singleOMU mode.

Dual

When the BSC6900 is configured with


two OMU boards, install the OMU
applications on the boards in dual-OMU
mode.

11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown in the
following figure.
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

12. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the message "Install OMU
succeed!" is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.
l

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
1.

Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.

2.

Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter to


navigate to the directory containing omutool.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

3.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
The omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal
IP address.
The omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal
IP address.
The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command
is used to change the fixed external IP address and subnet mask.
The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command
is used to change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa board.
The omutool debugcard IP address command is used to change the debugging
IP address.
NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

4.

Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.

Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rar file from the release document. Obtain the Upgrade
Guide to OMU Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

7.12.4 Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with an OMUc Board


This section describes how to replace an OMUa board with an OMUc board.

Context
l

Replacing an OMU board will disconnect the OMU board from the host boards. System
operation data during this period will lose.

In this scenario, the operating system (OS) of the OMUc board is Dopra Linux OS after
the replacement no matter which OS is used by the board to be replaced because the OMUc
board can only support Dopra Linux OS.

When an OMUa board in single-OMU mode is damaged, two OMUc boards are
recommended to replace the OMUa board.

OMUc boards can be used to replace OMUa boards. The replacement scenarios are as follows:

Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa Boards with Two OMUc Boards


This section describes how to replace two OMUa boards with two OMUc boards.

Prerequisites
l

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Two new OMUc boards are ready.

Context
Co-Existence of OMU Boards
l

Short-term co-existence of OMU boards is supported. When an OMUc board is used to


replace an OMUa board, the OMUc board and the OMUa board can be inserted into the
slots and co-exist for a short period, so that data can be transferred from the OMUa board
to the OMUc board.

Long-term co-existence of OMU boards in slots is not supported because the active and
standby OMU boards must be of the same type for commercial delivery in existing network.
For example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP OMU command to query information about the OMU and record the queried
information in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.
Record Sheet of OMU Software Installation Information of the OMU board to be replaced
records the following information:
l Administrator password
l Password of system administrator admin
l Password of FTP user FtpUsr
l External fixed IP address, external virtual IP address, internal fixed IP address, internal virtual
IP address, debugging IP address, and backup channel IP address of the OMU board
NOTE

This document uses the OMUa board as an example.

Step 2 Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU operating system
(OS).
1.

Log in to the standby OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging in to the OMU in the
BSC6900 UMTS OMU Administration Guide.

2.

Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to stop the omud process.

3.

Run the poweroff command to shut down the OMU OS.

Step 3 Run the RMV BRD command to remove two OMUa boards.
Step 4 Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board in the slot where the removed standby
OMU board originally resides, that is, the slot marked green in Figure 7-12.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 5 Remove the standby OMU board. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU board that
is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with
old ejector levers.
Step 6 Install the first OMUc board in the active and standby slots of the OMUa board. These slots are
the green slots shown in Figure 7-12.
The OMUa board is twice the thickness of other OMU boards. Two OMUa boards are installed
in the slots in blue, yellow, and red frames, as shown in Figure 7-12. Between two adjacent
OMUa boards, one is active and the other is standby.
The first OMUc board used for replacement must be installed in the green slots in the blue,
yellow, and red frames.
Example 1: Two OMUa boards are installed in the slots 20 through 23 before replacement. Slots
20 and 21 house the active OMUa board. Slot 22 and slot 23 are for the standby OMUa board.
Perform the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1.

Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 22 and 23.

2.

Install the first OMUc board in slot 23.

Example 2: Two OMUa boards are installed in the slots 20 through 23 before replacement. Slot
20s and 21 house the standby OMUa board. Slots 22 and 23 house the active OMUa board.
Perform the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1.

Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 20 and 21.

2.

Install the first OMUc board in slot 21.

Figure 7-12 Slots housing the first OMUc board

Step 7 Connect the PC and the ETH2 port on the OMU board with network cable.
Step 8 Set the IP address of the PC to be on the same network segment with the ETH2 port. The initial
IP address of the ETH2 port is 192.168.6.50 or 192.168.6.60, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Step 9 Logging in to the OMU.
1.

Run the SSH terminal, for example, PuTTY, on the PC, and type the debugging IP address
of the OMU.

2.

Logging in to the OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging in to the OMU in the BSC6900
UMTS OMU Administration Guide.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 10 Uploading the OMU application installation package to the OMU. For details, see Uploading
the OMU Application Installation Package to the OMU in the BSC6900 UMTS OMU
Administration Guide.
Step 11 Installing the OMU applications in the active workspace.
1.

Navigate to the directory where the OMU application installation package is saved.
Assume that the OMU application installation package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/
upgrade/V***R***C**/install/setup. Run the following command and press Enter:
cd /mbsc/upgrade/V***R***C**/install/setup

2.

Run the chmod +x ./install_bam.sh command to acquire the authority to run the ./
install_bam.sh command.

3.

Type the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the
product mode, as shown in the following figure.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :
NOTE

The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are installed automatically, because
they can be installed only if the check passes.

4.

Type the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the office
name, as shown in the following figure.
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

5.

Type the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the language, as
shown in the following figure.
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

6.

Type the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the admin password,
as shown in the following figure.
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only letters
and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :
NOTE

The admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.
The admin password is that of the former saved standby OMUa board.

7.

Type the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the FTP
password, as shown in the following figure.
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only letters
and figures.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

The FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can access the FTP
service with the FTP password.

8.

Type the FTP password and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the external
virtual IP address, as shown in the following figure.
# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE

External network virtual IP uses the saved former information of standby OMUa board. After the
OMU applications are installed, you can change the IP addresses and subnet masks of the OMU
Ethernet adapters with omutool.

9.

Type the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to enter the
OMU system type, as shown in the following figure.
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single:Install stand-alone system
# Dual:Install dual-OMU system.
The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU
system.
Please input a valid install_type :

10. Type Dual, and press Enter.


11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown in the following
figure.
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

12. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the message"Install OMU
succeed!" is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.
Step 12 Change IP addresses of OMU Ethernet adapters and their subnet masks
1.

Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the


directory containing omutool.

2.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal IP
address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal IP
address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change the
fixed external IP address and mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omuc IP address to change the backup
channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet
adapter on an OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omua IP address to change the backup
channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet
adapter on an OMUc board.
l Record the information about the OMU applications installation in Records of OMU
Software Installation Information.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

It is recommended that the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet
adapter B_UPDATE0 of the OMUc board be set to 192.168.9.60. In addition, set the backup channel IP
addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE1 to the backup channel
IP address of the OMUa board that has been removed in Records of the OMU Application Installation
Information.

Step 13 Record the information about the OMU applications installation in Records of OMU Software
Installation Information.
Step 14 Start the omud on the standby OMU board. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press
Enter to start the omud.
Step 15 Wait 10 minutes while the data of OMUa board and the OMUc board is being synchronized.
After the OMU OS, OMU applications and patches are installed, the data of the OMUa board
and the OMUc board is synchronized automatically.
Step 16 Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync
state is Data synchronization is successful, run the SWP OMU command to swap the OMU
boards.
Step 17 After the active/standby OMU switchover is complete, run the DSP OMU command to check
the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync state is Data synchronization is
successful, stop the OMUd process on the OMUa board, shut down the OMU OS, and remove
the standby OMUa board by referring to Step 2 to Step 3.
Step 18 Run the ADD BRD command to add OMUc boards in the active and standby slots of the OMUc
boards installed in Step 6. These slots are marked green in Figure 7-13
The green slots in Figure 7-13 are the slots for housing the second OMUc board.
For details on the active and standby board relationship, see Slots in the Subrack.
Figure 7-13 Slots housing the second OMUc board

Step 19 Repeat Step 5 to Step 6 to remove the OMUa and OMUc boards.
Step 20 Repeat operations in Step 7 to Step 11 to install OMU applications.
Step 21 Change IP addresses of OMU Ethernet adapters and their subnet masks by referring to operations
in Step 12.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

It is recommended that the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter
B_UPDATE0 of the OMUc board be set to 192.168.9.50. In addition, set the backup channel IP addresses of
the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE1 to the backup channel IP address of the
OMUa board that has been removed in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.

Step 22 Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
Step 23 Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync
state is Data synchronization is successful, start 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing
OMU Board.
----End

Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with Two OMUc Boards


This section describes how to replace an OMUa board with two OMUc boards.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

Two new OMUc boards are ready.

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing the USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance
(O&M), obtain the latest backup data for restoring the data on the new OMU board.
Co-Existence of OMU Boards
l

Short-term co-existence of OMU boards is supported. When an OMUc board is used to


replace an OMUa board, the OMUc board and the OMUa board can be inserted into the
slots and co-exist for a short period, so that data can be transferred from the OMUa board
to the OMUc board.

Long-term co-existence of OMU boards in slots is not supported because the active and
standby OMU boards must be of the same type for commercial delivery in existing network.
For example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

Two solutions can be adopted for the OMU replacement in terms of synchronizing data during
the replacement:
l

Solution 1: When slots beside the OMUa board in single-OMU mode are empty and
available, the OMUa board can be replaced by the OMUc board through short-term coexistence of OMU boards.

Solution 2: When slots beside the OMUa board in single-OMU mode are not empty and
available, the data of the OMUa board can be copied onto the OMUc board to complete
replacement.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Check whether slots beside the OMUa board are empty and available for installing the
OMUc board.
The OMUa board is twice the thickness of other OMU boards. Two OMUa boards are
installed in the slots in blue, yellow, and red frames, as shown in Figure 7-14. Between
two adjacent OMUa boards, one is active and the other is standby.
The first OMUc board used for replacement must be installed in the green slots in the blue,
yellow, and red frames.
Example 1: An OMUa board is installed in the slots 20 and 21 before replacement.
Replacing operations are as follows:
1.

Install the first OMUc board in slot 23.

2.

Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 20 and 21.

3.

Install the second OMUc board in slot 22.

Example 2: An OMUa board is installed in the slots 22 and 23 before replacement. Perform
the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1.

Install the first OMUc board in slot 21.

2.

Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 22 and 23.

3.

Install the second OMUc board in slot 20.

Figure 7-14 Slots housing the first OMUc board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Slots beside the OMUa board are empty


and available for installing the OMUc
board

Start Replacement Through CoExistence of OMU Boards.

Slots beside the OMUa are not available


for installing the OMUc board

Start Replacement by Copying Data of


OMU boards.

Replacement Through Co-Existence of OMU Boards


1.

Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to
appropriate values to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU
hard disk.

2.

Change the OMU working mode to dual-OMU mode.


a.

Log in to the active and standby OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging in
to the OMU.

b.

Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to stop the omud process.

c.

Enter cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to


navigate to the directory that contains the omutool process.

d.

Run the ./omutool dualmode dual command to set the OMU working mode to
dual-OMU.

e.

Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

3.

Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa board.

4.

Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board.

5.

In five minutes after the OMU board operating before replacement is started, run the
DSP OMU command. When the Operational state is Active normal, install the first
OMUc board in the slot shown in Figure 7-14.

6.

Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
NOTE

The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

7.

Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 7-16.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status. See Table 7-17.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system
installation, see Table 1 in Preparing the USB Storage Device.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-16 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU
operating system installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed
Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Table 7-17 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system and OMU applications installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed
Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or
off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or
off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

8.

Adjust all the IP addresses and masks on the standby OMU board and ensure there is
no conflict between the internal network fixed IP addresses, the external network fixed
IP addresses, and the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMU
boards. All these IP addresses meet the requirements for planning IP addresses. For
details about how to adjust IP addresses, see Changing the IP Addresses and Masks
for the new OMU Boards.

9.

Wait 10 minutes while the data of OMUa board and the OMUc board is being
synchronized.
After the OMU OS, OMU applications and patches are installed, the data of the
OMUa board and the OMUc board is synchronized automatically.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

10. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, run the SWP OMU command
to swap the OMU boards.
11. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, stop the omud process on the
OMUa board according to the OS type of the OMUa board, and shut down the OMU
OS by following operations.
If...

Then...

The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS


is used

1. Log in to the active and standby


OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging in to the OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop
command to stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut
down the OMU OS.

The Windows OS is used

1. Log in to the active and standby


OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging in to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand
then press Enter. The OMU
command interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to
stop the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list
box to shut down the OMU OS.

12. Remove the standby OMUa board. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU
board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board
that is configured with old ejector levers.
13. Install the second OMUc board in the active and standby slots of the first OMUc board.
These slots are the green slots shown in Figure 7-15.
The green slots in Figure 7-15 are the slots for housing the second OMUc board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-15 Slots housing the second OMUc board

14. Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
15. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
16. Adjust all the IP addresses and masks on the standby OMU board and ensure there is
no conflict between the internal network fixed IP addresses, the external network fixed
IP addresses, and the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMU
boards. All these IP addresses meet the requirements for planning IP addresses. For
details about how to adjust IP addresses, see Changing the IP Addresses and Masks
for the new OMU Boards.
17. Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
18. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, start 7.12.6 Common
Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
l

Replacement by Copying Data of OMU Boards


1.

Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to
appropriate values to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU
hard disk.

2.

Save the performance configuration file, SSL license file, and OMU system data to
the local PC.
a.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, see Starting the file
manager on the LMT.

b.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
NOTE

Run the LST OMUAREA command to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that the OMU
active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas directory.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\cert directory.
l License files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\license directory.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

3.

Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU OS.
If...

Then...

The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS


is used

1. Log in to the active and standby


OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging in to the OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop
command to stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut
down the OMU OS.

The Windows OS is used

1. Log in to the active and standby


OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging in to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand
then press Enter. The OMU
command interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to
stop the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list
box to shut down the OMU OS.

4.

Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa board.

5.

Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board.

6.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced. For detailed operations, see Replacing an
OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is configured with old ejector levers.

7.

Insert the two prepared USB flash drives into a USB port on two new OMU board
panels, respectively.

8.

Install the two new OMU boards in the slots for the active and standby OMUc boards.
NOTE

The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

9.

Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 7-16.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status. See Table 7-17.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system
installation, see Table 1 in Preparing the USB Storage Device.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-18 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU
operating system installation
Board

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN indicator


blinks.

l The RUN indicator is


off.

l The ALM indicator is


off.

l The ALM indicator


blinks.

l The ACT indicator is


off.

l The ACT indicator is


off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 7-19 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system and OMU applications installation
Board

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN indicator


blinks.

l The RUN indicator


blinks.

l The ALM indicator is


steady on or off.

l The ALM indicator


blinks.

l The ACT indicator is


steady on or off.

l The ACT indicator is


off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

10. Log in to the LMT and start the file manager.


11. Select the target file on the local PC and click Upload to upload Step 1 or the most
recently saved OMU data to the active workspace on the OMU hard disk. Ensure that
the upload path is the same as the backup download path.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming
that the active workspace is version_a:
Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.
12. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.
13. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.
14. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to
the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

15. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the
omu_backup_linker tool.
16. A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type
restore and press Enter.
17. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file
pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
18. Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process on the standby
OMUc board.
19. Run the DSP OMU command in five minutes after the database is restored and the
OMUc board is started. When Operational state is Active normal, log in to the
second OMUc board, enter /etc/rc.d/omud start, and press Enter to start the omud
process of the second OMUc board.
20. Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
21. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, start 7.12.6 Common
Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End

Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with an OMUc Board


This section describes how to replace an OMUa board with an OMUc board.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

Two new OMUc boards are ready.

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing the USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance
(O&M), obtain the latest backup data for restoring the data on the new OMU board.

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to appropriate values
to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU hard disk.
Step 2 Save the performance configuration file, SSL license file, and OMU system data to the local PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, see Starting the file manager
on the LMT.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click Download.
NOTE

Run the LST OMUAREA command to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that the OMU active
workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas directory. Only
DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\cert directory.
l License files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\license directory.

Step 3 Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU operating system
(OS).
If...

Then...

The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS is


used

1. Log in to the active and standby OMU. For


detailed operations, see Logging in to the
OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to
stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut down
the OMU OS.

The Windows OS is used

1. Log in to the active and standby OMU. For


detailed operations, see Logging in to the
OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand then
press Enter. The OMU command
interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to stop
the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list box to
shut down the OMU OS.

Step 4 Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa board.


Step 5 Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board.
Step 6 Remove the OMU board to be replaced. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU board
that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured
with old ejector levers.
Step 7 Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 8 Inset the new OMU board in the slots where the OMUa board is installed.
NOTE

The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

Step 9 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Check
the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating system
is installed successfully.
l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See
Table 7-20.
l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 7-21.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,
prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flash
drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system installation, see
Table 1 in Preparing the USB Storage Device.

Table 7-20 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system
installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 7-21 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system and
OMU applications installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 10 Log in to the LMT and start the file manager.


Step 11 Select the target file on the local PC and click Upload to upload Step 2 or the most recently
saved OMU data to the active workspace on the OMU hard disk. Ensure that the upload path is
the same as the backup download path.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming that the
active workspace is version_a:
l Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.
Step 12 Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed operations, see
Logging In to the OMU.
Step 13 Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.
Step 14 Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
Step 15 Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
Step 16 A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type restore
and press Enter.
Step 17 A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file pathname : ."
Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore
data. A message will be displayed showing success or failure. For example, "Restore OMU
database succeed!" may be displayed.
Step 18 Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
Step 19 Start 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End

7.12.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in DualSystem Mode


This section describes how to replace the active and standby OMUs when two OMUs are
configured as an active/standby pair on BSC6900. In this scenario, OMU operation and
maintenance of the host boards are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l

A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing the USB
Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches are
installed during the preparation.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context
l

Replace both the active and standby boards only when they are both faulty. Otherwise,
perform the operations described in 7.12.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in
Dual-System Mode. If OMUc boards are used instead of OMUa boards, see Scenario:
Replacing Two OMUa Boards with Two OMUc Boards.

The new OMUs can use the same operating system as the OMUs to be replaced or another
operating system, but the active and standby OMUs must use the same operating system.

The new OMUs must be of the same type as the OMUs to be replaced.

When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced,
it is recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU
board. This takes care of the user operation habit.

CAUTION
l To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground point
is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the active and standby OMUs by referring to Replacing an OMU board that is
configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old
ejector levers.
Step 2 Perform the following operations based on the operating system:
Option

Description

If the OMU operating 1. Connect a USB installation disk to a USB port on each of the new
OMUs.
system is Dopra Linux
2. Install the new OMUs into the slots for the active and standby
OMUs.
3. After one or two minutes, the USB installation disks start
installation. Check the status of the indicators on the OMU panels
to determine whether installation is complete. For details about
indicator status, see Table 1 and Table 2 in Scenario: Old OMU
Board Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board Running
Suse Linux/Windows
4. Perform the following operations based on the USB installation
disk type:
l If the operation type of the installation disk is Install, perform
Step 5.
l If the installation type of the USB installation disks is
Switch, go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing
OMU Board without needing to restore OMU data.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

If the OMU operating 1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation
source for Suse Linux. For details, see Preparations for
system is Suse Linux
Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating Operating
System Installation Source.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on
each of the new OMUs.
3. Install a new OMU in the slot for the active OMU. For details, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector
levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old
ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installing
the OMU Operating System by Using the EasyInstall Software.
5. Repeat steps a through d to install another OMU into the slot for
the standby OMU and install Suse Linux.
6. Install OMU applicationss on the active and standby OMUs. For
details, see Install OMU applications. in Scenario: Old OMU
Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
If the OMU operating 1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation
source for Windows. For details, see Preparations for Reinstalling
system is Windows
the OMU Operating System, Creating Operating System
Installation Source and Creating the Installation Source of the
SetWin Software and OS Patches.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on
each of the new OMUs.
3. Install a new OMU in the slot for the active OMU. For details, see
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector
levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old
ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the
OMU Operating System by Using the EasyInstall Software.
5. Repeat steps a through d to install another OMU into the slot for
the standby OMU and install Suse Linux.
6. Install OMU applicationss on the active and standby OMUs. For
details, see Install OMU applications. in Scenario: Old OMU
Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
Step 3 Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

If the OMU operating 1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press


Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.
system is Dopra Linux
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to
change the fixed internal IP address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to
change the virtual internal IP address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway)
command is used to change the fixed external IP address and
mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway)
command is used to change the virtual external IP address and
subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to
change the backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an
OMUa board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omuc IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of the active
and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet adapter on
an OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omua IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of the active
and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet adapter on
an OMUc board.
l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the
debugging IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start


the omud process.
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

If the OMU operating 1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/


bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
system is Suse Linux
omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to
change the fixed internal IP address.
l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to
change the virtual internal IP address.
l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway)
command is used to change the fixed external IP address and
mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway)
command is used to change the virtual external IP address and
subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to
change the backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an
OMUa board.
l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the
debugging IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start


the omud process.
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Option

Description

If the OMU operating 1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU
command mode.
system is Windows
2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and
press Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.
3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l The omutool innercard IP address command is used to
change the fixed internal IP address.
l The omutool innervip IP address command is used to change
the virtual internal IP address.
l The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP
address) command is used to change the fixed external IP
address and subnet mask.
l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP
address) command is used to change the virtual external IP
address and subnet mask.
l Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change
the backup channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs
of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
l The omutool debugcard IP address command is used to
change the debugging IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.

Step 4 Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive as shown in Table
7-22.
Table 7-22 Criteria for operations (3)
If...

Then...

The OMU OS is Suse


Linux

Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software


Center > Version Software > Wireless Product Line >
SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU Driver
Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux
Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please
refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M Panel Adapter
Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Windows

Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU


Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rarfile from the release document. Decompress the package and
obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Step 5 Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.
Step 6 Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.
Step 7 Download the latest backup data from the M2000 to the local computer For details, see Security
Management in M2000 Product Documentation.
Step 8 Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT. On
the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.
Step 9 Select the target file on the local computer and then click Upload file to upload the most recently
saved OMU data to the OMU hard disk. Ensure that the upload path is consistent with the
download path of the backup data and the data is uploaded to the active workspace.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming that the
active workspace is version_a:
l Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.
Step 10 Restore OMU data based on the operating system.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Option

Description

The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux

1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network


IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop
the omud process.
3. Refer to Steps a and B to log in to the active OMU and end the
omud process.
4. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press
Enter to navigate to the directory containing the
omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup
file pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the
file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure. For
example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
8. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
active OMU.
9. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
10.Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
standby OMU.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

The OMU OS is Suse 1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
Linux
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop
the omud process.
3. Refer to Steps a and B to log in to the active OMU and end the
omud process.
4. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/
services and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup
file pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the
file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure. For
example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
8. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
active OMU.
9. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
10.Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
standby OMU.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Option

Description

The OMU OS is
Windows

1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network


IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU
command mode.
3. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud progress.
4. Refer to Steps a through c to log in to the active OMU and end
the omud process.
5. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and
press Enter to navigate to the directory containing the
omu_backup_linker tool.
6. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
8. Type the backup file save path and the file name and press
Enter. The system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure. For example, "Restore
OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
9. Run net start omud to start omud on the active OMU.
10.Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
11.Run net start omud to start omud on the standby OMU.

Step 11 Go to 7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.


----End

7.12.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board


This section describes the common operation after replacing OMU board, including querying
the OMU working status, modifying the name of the OMU, setting the time information of the
OMU, and setting the mode of the network adapter.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: When the OMU runs the Dopra Linux operating system, set the OMU status to the
same status as that before the replacement based on the result recorded in Step 1 and Step 2.
For details, see Disabling OMU route forwarding and Disabling root user remote login.
Step 2 Log in to the LMT by referring to Log in to the LMT.
Step 3 Run the MML command DSP OMU to query such information as OMU running status, fixed
IP addresses, virtual IP addresses, data synchronization state, internal network connection state,
external network connection state, and backup channel connection state.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

l One OMU board is


Perform operations described in Step 4.
configured and its
Operational state is Normal
l Two OMU boards are
configured and their
Operational state is Active
normal and Standby normal
respectively
Operational state is Fault

Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 4 Based on Data-sync state queried in Step 3, do as follows:


If...

Then...

Data-sync state is not Data synchronization Clear alarms by referring to


is successful
ALM-20701 OMU Failure Switchover
and ALM-20704 OMU Data
Synchronization Failure. Go to Step 5
after the alarms are cleared.
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is Perform operations described in Step
successful
5.
Step 5 Run the MML commands LST VER and LST PATCHVER to query whether the OMU
software version and patch version are correct.
If...

Then...

They are correct

Perform operations described in Step 6.

They are incorrect

Obtain the OMU version software and patch software


again and install them.

Step 6 Run the MML command DSP OMUMODULE to query the status of the OMU processes.
If...

Then...

State is Active or Stopped


State is Abnormal

l In dual-OMU mode, go to Step 7.


l In single-OMU mode, go to Step 8.
Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 7 (For OMU boards in dual-OMU mode only) Run the MML command CMP OMUDATA to
compare data about active and standby OMU boards. Check whether alarm data, performance
data, and configuration data are consistent between the active and standby OMU boards.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The data is inconsistent

1. Run the MML command STR DATASYNC to start


data synchronization.
2. Perform operations described in Step 8.

The data is consistent

Perform operations described in Step 8.

Step 8 Run the MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the running license on host boards
is consistent with that on the OMU board.
If...

Then...

The licenses are inconsistent

1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20734


License Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 9.

The licenses are consistent

Perform operations described in Step 9.

Step 9 Run the MML command CMP BRDVER to check whether the running version on host boards
is consistent with that on the OMU board.
If...

Then...

The software versions are


inconsistent

1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20733


Software Version Inconsistency Between OMU and
Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 10.

The software versions are


consistent

Perform operations described in Step 10.

Step 10 Run the MML command ACT CRC to check whether the configuration data on host boards is
consistent with that on the OMU board.
If...

Then...

The configuration data is


inconsistent

1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20736 Data


Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 11.

The configuration data is


consistent

Perform operations described in Step 11.

Step 11 Run the MML command LST BRD to query Slot No. and Board Type of the OMU board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board type is inconsistent 1. Run the MML command RMV BRD to remove
configurations of the replaced OMU board.
before and after the OMU board
replacement
2. Run the MML command ADD BRD to add
configurations of the new OMU board.
3. Perform operations described in Step 12.
The board type is consistent
Perform operations described in Step 12.
before and after the OMU board
replacement
Step 12 Enter the command omutool hostname OMU name to modify the name of the OMU.
Step 13 Run the MML command LST TZ to query time zone and daylight saving time of the OMU
board.
If...

Then...

The time zone and daylight


saving time of the OMU is
inconsistent with the local time

1. Run the MML command SET TZ to set the time


information of the OMU.

The time zone and daylight


saving time of the OMU is
consistent with the local time

Perform operations described in Step 14.

2. Perform operations described in Step 14.

Step 14 Run the MML command DSP TIME to query Time of the OMU board.
If...

Then...

The time of the OMU is


inconsistent with the local time

1. Run the MML command SET TIME to set the time


information of the OMU.
2. Perform operations described in Step 15.

The time of the OMU is


consistent with the local time

Perform operations described in Step 15.

Step 15 Set the mode of the network adapter according to the router combined with OMU. For the
detailed setting method, please refer to Setting the Link Mode of the External OMU Ethernet
Adapters when the OS is Dopra. Refer to Setting the Link Mode of the External OMU Ethernet
Adapter when the OS is Windows.Normally the default value is self-adaption. Set the OMU port
as 100Mb/ Full Duplex only when the switchboard is forced to be 100Mb/full duplex.
Step 16 View the device panel on the LMT and check the status of all devices.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

No abnormal device state is


introduced by the replacement

The replacement is complete.

An abnormal device state is


introduced by the replacement

Contact Huawei technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.13 Replacing a PAMU Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty PAMU board. The PAMU board is hot-swappable.
It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box
or bag.

A new PAMU board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the status of the mute switch of the PAMU to be replaced.
For the position of the mute switch, see Panel of the PAMU Board.
Step 2 Set all bits of the DIP switch SW1 on the new PAMU to ON, as shown in Figure 7-16.
Figure 7-16 Setting of the DIP switch on the PAMU

Step 3 Loosen the screws on the monitoring board panel of the power distribution box with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in Figure 7-17.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-17 Removing the monitoring board panel of the power distribution box

1 Monitoring board panel of the power distribution box

2 Pan head screw M3

3 PAMU board

Step 4 Hold the monitoring board panel and remove the board from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Loosen the screws fixing the monitoring board panel to the PAMU board with a Phillips
screwdriver and remove the PAMU. as shown in Figure 7-18.
Figure 7-18 Removing the PAMU board

1 Monitoring board panel of the power distribution box

2 Pan head screw M3

3 PAMU board

Step 6 Put the PAMU board in the ESD box or bag.


Step 7 Fix the panel to the PAMU board and fasten the screws.
Step 8 Insert the new PAMU board along the guide rails.
Step 9 Fasten the screws fixing the monitoring board panel to the power distribution box.
Step 10 The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

For details about the state of the LEDs on the board, see LEDs on the PAMU Board.
NOTE

If the RUN LED blinks every other 0.25s or the ALM LED is ON, remove the PAMU and install it again
to ensure that the PAMU is in full contact with the backplane.

Step 11 When the RUN LED blinks every other second, you can infer that the board works properly.
Step 12 Set the mute switch on the new PAMU according to the recorded settings.
Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If an alarm is reported, locate and rectify the fault according to the alarm information.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You can obtain the bar code of the board on the PCB plate of the faulty board.

7.14 Replacing a PEUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty PEUa board. The PEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace a PEUa board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.

A new PEUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l Replacing the standby PEUa has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the PEUa board
that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the PEUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the PEUa board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the PEUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 3.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
PEUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 4 Disconnect the clock cable. Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable connector with a
flat-head screwdriver and disconnect the E1/T1 cable.
Step 5 Remove the PEUa board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Check whether the settings of the DIP switches on the new board are correct by referring to DIP
Switches on the PEUa Board.
If...

Then...

The settings are correct,

Go to Step 7.

The settings are incorrect,

1. Set the DIP switches correctly.


2. Go to Step 7.

Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Connect the E1/T1 cable and clock cable by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 11.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 11.


reported,
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 12.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

7.15 Replacing a POUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty POUa board. The POUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new POUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l Replacing the standby POUa has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the POUa board
that works independently, however, disrupts services carried by the subrack that houses the
board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the POUa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the POUa board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the POUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the POUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,
at midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the POUa board to
be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are standby, Go to Step 4.


The ports are active,

1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port over
to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS (Manual
Switchover from working link to protection link).
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
POUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 6 Remove the board by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 7 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the POUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
If...

Then...

The settings are correct,

Go to Step 8.

The settings are incorrect,

1. Set the DIP switches correctly.


2. Go to Step 8.

Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 13.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 12.

Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 13.


reported,
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 14.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.16 Replacing a POUc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty POUc board. The POUc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new POUc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
l Replacing the standby POUc board has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the POUc
board that works independently, however, disrupts services carried by the subrack that houses
the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the POUc board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the POUc board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the POUc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the POUc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the POUc board to
be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are standby, Go to Step 4.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The ports are active,

1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port to


standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS (Manual
Switchover from working link to protection link).
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
POUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 6 Remove the board by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and keep them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 9 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 12.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 11.

Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 12.


reported,
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 13.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 10.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 13 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.17 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty SCUa/SCUb board. The SCUa/SCUb board is
hot-swappable. It takes about four minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new SCUa/SCUb board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l Replacing the standby SCUa/SCUb board decreases the internal switching capacity and has
no effect on the services in the system.
l When no standby board is in position, replacing the SCUa/SCUb board in the MPS resets all
the other boards in the MPS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack.
l When no standby board is in position, replacing the SCUa/SCUb board in the EPS resets all
the other boards in the EPS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack. In addition,
the communication between the EPS and the MPS is disrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the SCUa/SCUb board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check
the configuration of the SCUa/SCUb board.
If...

Then...

Slots 6 and 7 are configured with the SCUa/SCUb boards,

Go to Step 2.

Slot 6 or 7 is configured with the SCUa/SCUb board,

Go to Step 3.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to


standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
A forced active/standby switchover will affect the running
of the system. Therefore, run this command when the
traffic is light, for instance, at midnight.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the SCUa/SCUb are legible. If the labels
are illegible, re-label the cables to avoid faulty connections after replacing the board.
Step 4 Disconnect the cables from the faulty board.
Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 7 Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 8 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

Only one SCUa/SCUb board is configured and the CPU status is Active Go to Step 10.
normal,
Two SCUa/SCUb boards are configured and the CPU status is Standby Go to Step 10.
normal,
The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 9.

Step 9 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 8.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 10.


reported,
Step 10 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 11.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 8.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 11 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.18 Replacing a UOIa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIa board. The UOIa board is hot swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new UOIa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l Replacing the standby UOIa board has no adverse effect on the system. When no standby
UOIa board is in position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the UOIa board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the UOIa board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the UOIa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal, 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board over
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance, at
midnight.

The CPU is in another status,

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the UOIa
board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.


The optical port is active,

1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port


over to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS
(Manual Switchover from working link to protection
link).
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
UOIa board are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, connect
the optical cable by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 13.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The CPU is in another status,

Go to Step 12.

Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 13.


reported,
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 14.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.19 Replacing a UOIc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIc board. The UOIc board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new UOIc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l Replacing the standby UOIc board has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the UOIc
board that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the UOIc board, the
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when you
replace the UOIc board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the UOIc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup,

Go to Step 2.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Backup type is No backup,

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the UOIc
board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.


The optical port is active,

1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port


to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS
(Manual Switchover from working link to protection
link).
2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
UOIc board are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
dustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, connect
the optical cable by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal,

Go to Step 13.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 12.

Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 13.


reported,
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 14.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.20 Replacing an SPUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty SPUa board. The SPUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, and dustfree cotton cloth.

A new SPUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
l Replacing the standby main control SPUa board has no adverse impact on the services in the
system. Replacing the main control SPUa board that works independently, however, disrupts
services carried in the subrack.
l Replacing the standby non main control SPUa board has no adverse impact on the services
in the system. Replacing the non main control SPUa board that works independently,
however, disrupts services carried in the board.

Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the SPUa board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check the
configuration of the SPUa board.
If...

Then...

The SPUa board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode,

Go to Step 2.

The SPUa board to be replaced does not work in the active/standby mode, Go to Step 3.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 2 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 3 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the SPUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal, 1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance, at
midnight.

The CPU is in another status,

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Remove the SPUa board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 4 Insert the new SPUa board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 5 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The SPUa board to be replaced does not work in the active/standby mode, Go to Step 7.
CPU status is Active normal,
The SPUa board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode, CPU
status is Standby normal,

Go to Step 7.

The CPU is in another status,

Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 5.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 7.


reported,
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 8.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 8 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

7.21 Replacing an SPUb Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty SPUb board. The SPUb board is hot-swappable.
It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or
bag, and dustfree cotton cloth.

A new SPUb board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
l Replacing the standby main control SPUb board has no adverse impact on the system.
Replacing the main control SPUb board that works independently, however, disrupts services
carried in the subrack.
l Replacing the standby non-main control SPUb board has no adverse impact on the system.
Replacing the non-main control SPUb board that works independently, however, disrupts
services carried on the board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the SPUb board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check the
configuration of the SPUb board.
If...

Then...

The SPUb board to be replaced works in active/standby mode,

Go to Step 2.

The SPUb board to be replaced does not work in active/standby mode,

Go to Step 3.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 2 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 3 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the SPUb board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal,

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
CAUTION
Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Remove the SPUb board to be replaced by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board.
Step 4 Install the new SPUb board into the subrack by referring to 7.1.2 Inserting a Board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinks
every other 0.125s.
Step 5 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status of
the new board.
If...

Then...

The SPUb board to be replaced does not work in active/standby mode,


CPU status is Active normal,

Go to Step 7.

The SPUb board to be replaced works in active/standby mode, CPU


status is Standby normal,

Go to Step 7.

The parameter is of any other values,

Go to Step 6.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 5.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 7.


reported,
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table,

Go to Step 8.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table,
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 8 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in the BSC6900 site maintenance record and pack the replaced board. When packing a
board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

7.22 Replacing a Subrack


This section describes how to replace a faulty BSC6900 subrack with a new BSC6900 subrack.
After 60 minutes from cutting off the power supply of a faulty subrack, a new subrack will start
working properly.

Prerequisites
l

Tools required for adding subracks are available. The tools include an ESD wrist strap, a
socket wrench, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, diagonal pliers, a dustfree
cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

Standby subracks are ready.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

CAUTION
l Replacing the MPS disrupts all the services carried in the BSC6900.
l Replacing the EPS disrupts all the services carried in this subrack.
l You should quickly replace a subrack with caution when the traffic is light, for instance, at
midnight.
l For safety reason, three persons are required to replace a subrack due to the heavy weight.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the labels on the cables are legible. If the labels are illegible, relabel the cables
to avoid incorrect connections after replacing the subrack.
Step 2 Record the installation positions of the boards in the subrack.
Step 3 Check the types of subracks to be replaced. Perform the following operations accordingly:
If...

Then...

EPS Turn off the power switch for the subrack to be replaced.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

MPS 1. Raise the ejector levers of the OMUa/OMUc board, as shown in part B of Removing
the OMUa/OMUc board. Repeat this step if two OMUa boards are in the subrack.
2. Turn off the power switch for the subrack to be replaced after the OFFLINE LED
on the OMUa/OMUc board is steady on.

NOTE

Assign switches for BSC6900 cabinets by referring to labels on the front panel of the power distribution
box. For details, see 4.1 Distribution of Power Switches.

Step 4 Disconnect the cables connected to the subrack.


Step 5 Remove the boards from the subrack in order by referring to 7.1.1 Removing a Board. Then,
put them in the ESD boxes or bags.
Step 6 Remove the eight captive screws fixing the subrack on the cabinet from the front of the cabinet
by a Phillips screwdriver and reserve them for future use. Four captive screws are at the left side
and the other are at the right side.
Step 7 One person pushes the subrack along the guide rails from the back of the cabinet. The other two
persons hold the subrack by the mounting ears with hands supporting the base of the subrack
and remove the subrack from the cabinet.
Step 8 Two people hold the mounting ears and support the base of the subrack. Slide the subrack along
the guiding rail into the cabinet, and then fasten the screws to fix the subrack.
Step 9 Set the DIP switches of the new subrack by referring to the DIP switch setting of the subrack to
be replaced. For details about BSC6900 Checking and Setting DIP Switches on Subracks, see
DIP Switch on the Subrack.
Step 10 Install the power cables for the new subrack:
1.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Take off the cover of the power cable connection box and unscrew the power ports, as
shown in Figure 7-19.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 7-19 Power cable connection box

2.

Connect the power cables to the power ports in the subrack, as shown in Figure 7-20.

Figure 7-20 Connecting the power cable to the power port

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3.

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Install the cover of the power cable connection box, as shown Figure 7-21.

Figure 7-21 Installing the cover of the power cable connection box

Step 11 Insert the boards into the subrack by referring to the records in Step 2 and 7.1.2 Inserting a
Board.
Step 12 Install an inter-SCUa or inter-SCUb cable:
l If the new subrack is to be configured with SCUa boards, install the inter-SCUa cables
between different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-SCUa Cables
Between Different Subracks.
l If the new subrack is to be configured with SCUb boards, install inter-SCUb SFP+ highspeed cables between different subracks according to instructions in Installing the InterSCUb SFP+ High-Speed Cables Between Different Subracks.
Step 13 Install the Ethernet cables and fiber optics for connecting the interface boards.
Step 14 Turn on the power switch on the new subrack.
Step 15 Carry out load commissioning and service commissioning.
For detailed procedures for commissioning, see the BSC6900 UMTS Commissioning Guide.
Step 16 After replacing a BSC6900 subrack, check whether alarms related to faults in subracks are
cleared, such as a Cell Setup Failure alarm. If the alarms are not cleared, clear them by referring
to the alarm online help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact Huawei for technical support.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty subrack.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

7.23 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack


When an independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 is faulty, the independent fan subrack must
be replaced. It takes about 15 minutes to replace an independent fan subrack.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head
screwdriver, diagonal pliers, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

A new independent fan subrack is ready.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 View the label for each port at the rear of the fan subrack, as shown in Figure 7-22. If a label is
not legible, attach a new label to avoid wrong connection after replacing the fan subrack.
Figure 7-22 Rear view of the fan subrack

1 Monitor 1 port for the connection to the power


distribution box

2 Power input port

3 Monitor 2 port (reserved)

4 Monitor 0 port for the connection to the BSC6900 5 Monitor 3 port (reserved)
subrack

Step 2 Turn off the power switch that control the independent fan subrack to be replaced.
NOTE

For distribution of the BSC6900 power switches, see the labels on the front panel of the power distribution
box. For details, see 4.1 Distribution of Power Switches.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 3 Remove the four screws that fix the independent fan subrack from the front of the cabinet and
reserve them for future use.
Step 4 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the fan subrack, and then pull the fan subrack
for a short distance so that the cables connected to the independent fan subrack can be removed.
Step 5 Remove the cables connected to the independent fan subrack by referring to 8 Replacing the
Cables.
Step 6 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the fan subrack, and then remove the
independent fan subrack from the cabinet.
Step 7 Connect monitoring signal cables and PGND cable to the new independent fan subrack.
Step 8 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the new independent fan subrack, and then
push the independent fan subrack slowly into the cabinet along the guide rails.

CAUTION
l Do not push the independent fan subrack completely into the cabinet, that is, certain space
should be reserved for installing cables.
l Pay attention to the mounting bar and guide rails when installing cables.
Step 9 Connect the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box and power cables to the new
independent fan subrack.
Step 10 Connect the monitoring signal cable to the monitor 0 port on the new independent fan subrack.
Step 11 Connect the PGND cable to the mounting bar.
Step 12 Push the independent fan subrack completely into the subrack.
Step 13 Fix the screws on the panel of the independent fan subrack.
Step 14 Turn on the power switch that control the independent fan subrack on the power distribution
box.
Step 15 Perform service commissioning.
For detailed procedures, see the BSC6900 UMTS Commissioning Guide.
Step 16 After replacing the independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 cabinet, check whether the alarms
related to the independent fan subrack are cleared. If these alarms persist, clear them by referring
to the alarm online help on the LMT. If these alarms still persist, contact Huawei for technical
support.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced independent fan subrack.

7.24 Replacing the Power Distribution Box


This section describes how to replace a faulty power distribution box. It takes about 25 minutes
to replace a power distribution box.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, cable ties,
diagonal pliers, insulation tapes, and sticky label papers.

A new power distribution box is configured according to actual requirements on site.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

CAUTION
l Replacing the power distribution box in the EPR disrupts all the services carried by the EPR.
l Replacing the power distribution box in the MPR disrupts all the services carried by the
whole BSC6900.
Figure 7-23 shows the rear panel of the power distribution box.
Figure 7-23 Rear panel of the power distribution box

1 Power input terminals

2 Power output terminals

3 Port connecting the power distribution box and a service subrack

4 2-hole grounding screw

On the power input terminal block, the installation positions for the -48 V power cables are
labeled 3(-), 2(-), and 1(-), and the installation positions for the RTN power cable are labeled
3(+), 2(+), and 1(+).

The installation positions for the -48 V power cables and RTN power cables are labeled
NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the power output terminal block of the power distribution box.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Procedure
Step 1 Record the state of each switch on the power distribution box. Set all the switches to OFF.
Step 2 Set the switch on the DC PDF controlling the power supply of the cabinet to OFF.

CAUTION
After powering off the cabinet, wait for five minutes, and then perform the replacement.
Step 3 Loosen the screws on the rear transparent plastic filler panel of the power distribution box by
using the M3 Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the plastic filler panel.
Step 4 Remove the cables from the power distribution box. Figure 7-23 shows the cables connected to
the panel of the power distribution box.
l Check the engineering labels on the power input cables, as shown in 1 of Figure 7-23. If the
label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position of the cable. Then remove
the power cables.
l Check the engineering labels on the power output cables, as shown in 2 of Figure 7-23. If
the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position of the cable. Then
remove the power cables.
l Remove the monitoring cable that is connected to the port shown in 3 of Figure 7-23.
l Remove the PGND cable that is connected to the busbar of the cabinet from the power
distribution box.
Step 5 Remove the four screws from the hanger of the power distribution box. Keep the removed screws
properly for future use.
Step 6 Remove the screws on the front panel of the power distribution box by using the M3 Phillips
screwdriver. Then, remove the MCBs and filler panels from the power distribution box. Keep
the removed components for future use.
Step 7 Hold the handle of the power distribution box and take it out of the cabinet.
Step 8 Loosen the six screws on the front plastic panel of the new power distribution box by using the
M3 Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the plastic panel.
Step 9 Install the MCBs in the new power distribution box. Note the installation positions.
Step 10 Install the filler panels at the positions where MCBs are not installed in the new power
distribution box.
Step 11 Install the plastic panel of the new power distribution box, install the power distribution box on
the top of the cabinet, and then fasten the four screws on the front hanger of the power distribution
box.
Step 12 Connect the cables to the power distribution box.
l Connect the PGND cable to the power distribution box.
l Connect the power input cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary label. Then,
stick a new engineering label to the cable.
l Connect the power output cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary label.
Then, stick a new engineering label to the cable.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

l Connect the signal monitoring cable to the power distribution box.


Step 13 Ensure that all the power cables are correctly connected.
Step 14 Set the switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box on the PDF to ON.
Step 15 Set the switches on the power distribution box to ON by referring to the records in Step 1.
Step 16 Install the transparent plastic filler panel at the rear of the power distribution box.
Step 17 After replacing the power distribution box, check the items in Table 7-23.
Table 7-23 Checklist for the new power distribution box
Item

Result

Action

LEDs on the panel show


the normal status of the
power distribution box.
For details about the
LEDs, refer to LEDs on
the PAMU Board.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

1. Check whether the power input


cables are correctly connected.
If the power input cables are
incorrectly connected,
reconnect the cables.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

Alarms related to the


power distribution box
failure are cleared.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

1. Clear the alarms by referring to


the alarm online help on the
LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

The power distribution


box supplies power to all
the components in the
cabinet.

Yes

End the check.

No

1. Check whether the power


output cables are correctly
connected. If the power output
cables are incorrectly
connected, turn off all the
switches on the power
distribution box and the switch
that controls the cabinet on the
PDF. Then reconnect the
cables.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

After powering on the cabinet, check the power supply to the internal components and handle problems
accordingly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty power distribution box.

7.25 Replacing the Fan Box


When a fan box in the service subrack or in the independent fan subrack is faulty, the fan box
must be replaced. You should finish the replacement of the fan box in less than one minute.

Prerequisites
l
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and flat-head
screwdriver.
The backup fan box is clean.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

CAUTION
Replacing the fan box severely affects the heat dissipation; therefore, you are advised to replace
the fan box within one minute. Otherwise, the boards may be damaged due to high temperature.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DIP switch on the PFCU according to the installation position and actual configuration
of the fan box.
l If the fan box is located in the service subrack and the PFCU board is configured, set the DIP
switch on the PFCU board (as shown in Figure 7-24) in the new fan box according to Table
7-24.
Figure 7-24 DIP switch on the PFCU

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 7-24 Setting of the DIP switch on the PFCU


DIP Switch

DIP Bit

Switch Status

Description

SW1

1 (the least significant


bit)

OFF

ON

ON

4 (the most significant


bit)

ON

l If the fan box is located in the independent fan subrack and the PFCU board is configured,
set the DIP switch on the PFCU board (as shown in Figure 7-25) in the new fan box according
to Table 7-25.
Figure 7-25 DIP switch on the PFCU

Table 7-25 Setting of the DIP switch on the PFCU


DIP Switch

DIP Bit

Switch Status

Description

SW1

1 (the least significant


bit)

ON

ON

OFF

4 (the most significant


bit)

ON

Step 2 Loosen the captive screws from the panel of the fan box.
Step 3 Remove the fan box along the guide rails, as shown in Figure 7-26. When the fan box is almost
out of the cabinet, hold the bottom of the fan box with one hand and the handle with the other
until the fan box is removed from the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
When replacing the fan box, do not put your hand inside the fan box. Otherwise, the revolving
blade may injure your fingers.

Figure 7-26 Removing the fan box

1 Handle

2 Screw

3 LED

Step 4 Reserve the replaced fan box for later handling.


Step 5 Insert the fan box into the subrack along the guide rails by holding the bottom of the fan box
with one hand and the handle with the other hand. Then, push the fan box by holding two handles
on the fan box along the guide rails until the fan starts to work.
Step 6 Secure the captive screws on the panel.
Step 7 After replacing the fan box, check the items in Table 7-26.
Table 7-26 Checklist for replacing the fan box

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Item

Result

Action

Whether the LEDs on the panel


show that the fan box is in normal
state. For details on the LEDs,
refer to the following section:
Fan Box (Configured with the

Yes

Check the next item.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Item

Result

Action

PFCU Board) if PFCU is


configured.

No

1. Pull out the fan box


slightly. Then, adjust
the fan box position and
push the fan box back in
position.
2. If the alarm box is still
abnormal, contact
Huawei Customer
Service Center.

Whether the alarms caused by


the faulty fan box are cleared.

Yes

End the check.

No

1. Clear the alarms by


referring to the alarm
online help on the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei
Customer Service
Center.

Step 8 Clean the replaced fan box, and then put it in an ESD box or bag.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the replaced fan box.

7.26 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module


This section describes how to replace a pluggable optical module when the module is faulty.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, the ESD box or bag, and the diagonal
pliers.

A new optical module is ready.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
In short-distance transmission, the multi-mode optical module is used with the multi-mode
fibers. The effective transmission distance is 2 km. In long-distance transmission, the singleIssue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

mode optical module is used with the single-mode fibers. The effective transmission distance
can be 15 km, 40 km, or 80 km. Generally, the single-mode optical module with the effective
transmission distance of 15 km is used. The BSC6900 and its peer equipment must use the same
type of the optical module, which mainly features the mode and wavelength.
Table 7-27 lists the related parameters of the optical modules.
Table 7-27 Parameters of optical modules

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Optic
al
Modu
le
Type

Pr
oto
col
Ty
pe

Optical
Connecto
r Type

Oper
ating
Wav
eleng
th

Ra
te

Trans
missi
on
Dista
nce

Max./Min.
Output
Optical
Power

Satura
tion
Optica
l
Power

Receiv
er
Sensiti
vity

Multimode
optical
modul
e

ST
M
1

LC/PC

1310
nm

15
5
Mb
it/s

2 km

-14/-19 dBm

-14
dBm

-30
dBm

Single
-mode
optical
modul
e

ST
M
1

LC/PC

1310
nm

15
5
Mb
it/s

15 km

-8/-15 dBm

-8 dBm

-31
dBm

Multimode
optical
modul
e

GE

LC/PC

850
nm

1.2
5
Gb
it/s

0.5 km

-2.5/-9.5 dBm

0 dBm

-17
dBm

Single
-mode
optical
modul
e

GE

LC/PC

1310
nm

1.2
5
Gb
it/s

10 km

-3/-9 dBm

-3 dBm

-20
dBm

Multimode
optical
modul
e

10
GE

LC/PC

850n
m

10.
31
25
Gb
it/s

0.3 km

-1/-7.3 dBm

-1 dBm

-11.1
dBm

Single
-mode
optical
modul
e

10
GE

LC/PC

1310
nm

10.
31
25
Gb
it/s

10 km

0.5/-8.2 dBm

0.5
dBm

-12.6
dBm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

l Replacing the hot-swappable optical module on the standby optical interface board does not have a
negative effect on the system.
l If there is no standby board in position, replacing the hot-swappable optical module on the active optical
interface board disrupts all the services carried on the board.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the optical cable from the optical port.
Step 2 After removing the optical cable, use a protective cap to cover the optical connector.
Step 3 Unlock the bayonet, as shown in part 1 of Figure 7-27. Remove the optical module, as shown
in part 2 of Figure 7-27.
Figure 7-27 Replacing an optical module

Step 4 Put the removed optical module into an ESD bag.


Step 5 Insert the new optical module into the socket on the optical interface board. Ensure that the
bayonet lock is secure.
Step 6 Connect the optical cable to the optical port. Ensure that the TX and RX ends of the optical cable
are connected correctly. You can hear a click sound when the optical cable is securely connected.
Step 7 Check whether the alarm related to the optical module is cleared.
NOTE

An alarm is generated when the optical module is removed. The alarm is cleared when the optical module
is reinstalled.

----End
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to handle the replaced optical module.

7.27 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner


This section describes how to replace an optical splitter/combiner. The BSC6900 optical
splitters/combiners are LC/LC-LC single-mode optical splitter/combiner and LC/LC-LC multimode optical splitter/combiner. It takes about five minutes to replace an optical splitter/
combiner.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are ready: the ESD wrist strap, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner, and
diagonal pliers.

The following materials are ready: cable ties and permanent labels.

A new optical splitter/combiner is ready.

The number and type of optical splitters/combiners to be replaced are clear.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

CAUTION
l When replacing the optical splitter/combiner, do not look into the optical port without eye
protection.
l Replacing an optical splitter/combiner disrupts ongoing services on the corresponding
interface boards. Therefore, replace it in low traffic hours, for example, at midnight.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new optical splitter/combiner for easy identification. It is
recommended that content of the temporary labels be identical with the labels on the old optical
splitter/combiner.
Step 2 Put the new optical splitter/combiner aside the old optical splitter/combiner.
Step 3 Disconnect the optical fiber by pressing the tab on the optical connector. Then, remove the optical
splitter/combiner to be replaced.
Step 4 Install the new optical splitter/combiner by referring to Installing the Optical Splitter/Combiner.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Replacing Boards and Modules

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of the new optical splitter/combiner must be correctly connected.
Otherwise, optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new optical splitter/combiner with the engineering labels.
The content of the engineering labels must be identical with that of the temporary labels. For
details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the optical splitters/combiners.
Step 7 Check the items listed in Table 7-28.
Table 7-28 Checklist for monitoring optical splitter/combiner replacement
Item

Result

Action

Connection of the
optical fiber is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the optical fiber and reconnect it.

Optical connectors
are properly inserted
into the related
ports.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the optical connectors.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

Clear the alarms by referring to the alarm online


help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.

Alarms related to the


transmission cable
are cleared.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced optical splitter/combiner to prevent environmental pollution.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Replacing the Cables

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to replace the Ethernet cable, E1/T1 cable, optical cable, clock signal
cable, cable to the alarm box, and power distribution box monitoring cable. This chapter also
describes how to check that the cables are successfully replaced and how to handle the faulty
cables.

Context
The requirements of installing the signal cables see the Principles of Installing the Signal Cables.
8.1 Replacing a Power Cable
This section describes how to replace a power cable. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a power
cable in overhead mode and about 30 minutes to replace a power cable in underfloor mode.
8.2 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable
This section describes how to replace an E1/T1 cable of the BSC6900. The cable consists of the
Y-shaped 75-ohm coaxial cable and Y-shaped 120-ohm twisted pair cable. It takes about 10
minutes to replace an E1/T1 cable.
8.3 Replacing an Optical Cable
This section describes how to replace an optical cable. The BSC6900 optical cables are LC/PCSC/PC single mode optical cable, LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC single
mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-LC/PC single mode optical
cable, and LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. It takes about five minutes to replace the
cable.
8.4 Replacing an Ethernet Cable
This section describes how to replace an Ethernet cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace an
Ethernet cable.
8.5 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable
This section describes how to replace a clock signal cable. It takes five to twenty minutes to
replace a clock signal cable depending on the installation position of the reference clock.
8.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable
This section describes how to replace a Y-shaped clock cable. It takes about 5 to 20 minutes to
replace a Y-shaped clock cable, depending on the installation position of the Y-shaped clock
cable.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

8.7 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable


This section describes how to replace the RS485 communication cable. It takes about five
minutes to replace the RS485 communication cable.
8.8 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm Box
This section describes how to replace a signal cable connected to the alarm box. It takes five to
twenty minutes to replace a signal cable depending on the installation position of the alarm box.
8.9 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box
This section describes how to replace a monitoring cable of the power distribution box. It takes
about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring cable.
8.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack
This section describes how to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
It takes about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
8.11 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable
This section describes how to replace an SFP+ high-speed cable. It takes about 10 minutes to
replace an SFP+ high-speed cable.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

8.1 Replacing a Power Cable


This section describes how to replace a power cable. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a power
cable in overhead mode and about 30 minutes to replace a power cable in underfloor mode.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the diagonal pliers, wrench, medium-size flat-head
screwdriver, large-size Phillips screwdriver, and socket wrench.

The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.

The backup power cable is ready.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l Replacing the power cable between the PDF and the power distribution box may affect the
system operation. If the single-input external power is supplied, the replacement causes the
system to power off, therefore disrupting the services carried on the system. If the dual-input
external power is supplied, the replacement does not affect the system operation, but triggers
a power failure alarm.
l Replacing the power cable between the power distribution box and the subrack may affect
the system operation. If the single-input power is supplied, the replacement causes the
subrack to power off, therefore disrupting the services of the subrack. If the dual-input power
is supplied, the replacement does not affect the system operation.
l Replacing the power cable between the power distribution box and the independent fan
subrack may affect the system operation. If the single-input power is supplied, the
replacement causes the independent fan subrack to power off, therefore disrupting the
services of the independent fan subrack. If the dual-input power is supplied, the replacement
does not affect the system operation.
l Before replacing a power cable, check the power supply mode (for example, single input or
dual input) of the power cable. In the case of single input, be well prepared for the possible
service interruption.
Lay power cables or install power cables by referring to Installing the Power Cables and PGND
Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the quantity, length, and type of the -48 V power cables and GND cables to be replaced.
Ensure that the backup -48 V cables and GND cables are of the proper length and type. Ensure
that the power cable connectors are available.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Step 2 Attach temporary labels to the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable for easy identification.
The content on the temporary label should be consistent with the content on the engineering
label of the power cable to be replaced.
Step 3 Set switches SW1 to SW6, as described in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Setting switches SW1 to SW6
Type of Power Cable External Power Supply
to Be Replaced
Mode

Operation

Power cable between


the PDF and the power
distribution box

Single input

Record the states of the switches


for power output and turn off all
the switches that are ON.

Dual input/double dual inputs

Record the states of the switches


for power output and turn off the
switch that controls the -48 V
power cable to be replaced.

Power cable between


the power distribution
box and the subrack

Single input/dual input

Record the states of the switches


for power output and turn off the
switch that controls the -48 V
power cable to be replaced.

Power cable between


the power distribution
box and the independent
fan subrack

Single input/dual input

Record the states of the switches


for power output and turn off the
switch that controls the -48 V
power cable to be replaced.

Step 4 To replace the power cable between the PDF and the power distribution box, set the switch on
the DC PDF that controls the power supply of the cabinet to OFF, and then disconnect the input
power of the power distribution box. To replace the power cable between the power distribution
box and the subrack/independent fan subrack, skip this step.
Step 5 Remove the original -48 V power cable and GND cable, and lay out the backup -48 V power
cable and GND cable.
Step 6 Connect the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable to the corresponding ports.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable with the
engineering labels.
The content on the engineering label of the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable must be
consistent with the content on the engineering label of the original -48 V power cable and GND
cable. For details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 8 Bind the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable.
Step 9 Check whether the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable are correctly connected, and check
whether a short-circuit occurs in the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable by using a
multimeter.
Step 10 Set the switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box on the PDF to ON.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Step 11 Set the switches whose original states are ON to ON according to the records in step 3.
Step 12 After replacing the power cable, check the items listed in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 Checklist for power cable replacement
Item

Result

Action

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Remove the power cable and


reconnect it.

The connectors of the


power cable are properly
inserted into the port.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Alarms related to the


power cable are cleared.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

1. Clear the alarms by


referring to the alarm
online help on the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei for
technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced power cable properly to prevent short-circuits and environmental
pollution.

8.2 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable


This section describes how to replace an E1/T1 cable of the BSC6900. The cable consists of the
Y-shaped 75-ohm coaxial cable and Y-shaped 120-ohm twisted pair cable. It takes about 10
minutes to replace an E1/T1 cable.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, flat-head screwdriver, and diagonal
pliers.

The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.

A new E1/T1 cable is ready.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

CAUTION
l Replacing the E1/T1 cable disrupts the services carried over the E1/T1 cable.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer end are connected through only the E1/T1 cable, all the services
between the BSC6900 and its peer end are disrupted during the replacement.
Lay E1/T1 cables or install E1/T1 cables by referring to Installing the E1/T1 Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the E1/T1 cables to be replaced. Arrange for a new
E1/T1 cable with proper length and type. Note that extra length should be reserved.
Step 2 Add a connector for the DDF to the new E1/T1 cable.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels to the new E1/T1 cable. The content on the temporary label should be
consistent with the content on the original label.
NOTE

To facilitate the routing of E1/T1 cables in real situations, you may have to remove the side doors and rear
door of the cabinet. Install the removed doors after arranging the E1/T1 cables.

Step 4 Lay out the new E1/T1 cable along the original routing, or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 5 On the BSC6900 side, remove the fastening screws on both ends of the E1/T1 cable without
using any tools. Then, disconnect the E1/T1 cable to be replaced from the BSC6900 and the
DDF respectively.
Step 6 Connect the new E1/T1 cable without using any tools to the original ports on the BSC6900 and
the DDF.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content on the engineering label of the new E1/T1 cable must be identical with the content
on the engineering label of the original E1/T1 cable. For details, see Attaching an Engineering
Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 8 Bind the new E1/T1 cables.
Step 9 After replacing the E1/T1 cable, check the following item listed in Table 8-3.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Table 8-3 Checklist for E1/T1 cable replacement


Item

Result

Action

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the E1/T1 cable and


reconnect it.

The connectors of the


E1/T1 cable are
properly inserted into
the ports.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Alarms related to
transmission cable are
cleared.

Yes

End the check.

No

1. Clear the alarms by referring


to the alarm online help on
the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical
support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced E1/T1 cable properly to prevent short circuit and environmental
pollution.

8.3 Replacing an Optical Cable


This section describes how to replace an optical cable. The BSC6900 optical cables are LC/PCSC/PC single mode optical cable, LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC single
mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-LC/PC single mode optical
cable, and LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. It takes about five minutes to replace the
cable.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner,
and diagonal pliers.

The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

A new optical cable is ready.

Confirm the quantity, length, and type of optical cables to be replaced.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

CAUTION
l When replacing the optical cable, invisible laser radiation might be emitted from
disconnected fibers or optical connectors. Do not stare into the beams or view directly with
optical instruments to prevent eye damages.
l When the BSC6900 and other NEs are connected in optical port backup mode, replacing one
optical cable does not affect services of the system. Otherwise, replacing an optical cable
disrupts all the services carried on that cable.
l When the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the optical cable, all
services between them are disrupted during the replacement.
Lay optical cables or install optical cables by referring to Installing the Optical Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be consistent with that of the original label.
Step 2 Lay out the new optical cable according to the original routing or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 3 Remove the optical cable to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The connector type is LC/PC or SC/PC. Press the tab on the connector and remove the
cable.
The connector type is FC/PC,

Unscrew the optical connector counterclockwise.

NOTE

If the removed optical cable is not damaged, cap the connector. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.

Step 4 Remove the dustproof cap from the optical connector and reserve the cap for later use. Connect
the new cable to the original ports.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

CAUTION
For the LC/PC, SC/PC or FC/PC connector, the TX end and the RX end must be connected
correctly by referring to the temporary label. Otherwise, the signal cannot be received or
transmitted.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels. Content of the
engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details, see Attaching
an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the new optical cable.
Step 7 Check the items in Table 8-4.
Table 8-4 Checklist for optical cable replacement
Item

Result

Action

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the cable and reconnect it.

The connectors of
the optical cable are
properly inserted
into the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Yes

End the check.

No

Clear these alarms by referring to the alarm online


help on the LMT. If the faults persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.

Alarms related to the


transmission cable
are cleared.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced optical cables to prevent environmental pollution.

8.4 Replacing an Ethernet Cable


This section describes how to replace an Ethernet cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace an
Ethernet cable.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Ethernet cable meter, Ethernet cable
pliers, and diagonal pliers.

The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

A new Ethernet cable is ready.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

CAUTION
l Replacing the Ethernet cables to the LMT disrupts the communication between the LMT PC
and the OMU.
l The Port Trunking function is used in the interconnection ports on the inter-subrack SCUa
board. Replacing one Ethernet cable has no adverse effect on the system.
l For the FG2a board, if the BSC6900 is connected to the peer equipment through only the
Ethernet cable, services carried between the BSC6900 and the peer equipment are disrupted
during the replacement of the Ethernet cable.
l The OMUa board is configured with a pair of Ethernet cables. Replacing one of them has no
adverse impact on the system.
l

Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the Ethernet cables to be replaced. The Ethernet
cables from different manufacturers differ in color and diameter. The new Ethernet cable
should be compatible with the cable to be replaced.

Lay Ethernet cables or install Ethernet cables by referring to Installing the Ethernet Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Arrange for a new Ethernet cable with proper length and type. Note that extra length should be
reserved.
Step 2 Assemble the shielded RJ45 connector the unshielded RJ45 connector and the Ethernet cable
according to the actual requirements by referring to Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector
and the Ethernet Cable or Assembling the Unshielded RJ45 Connector and the Ethernet Cable,
and then check the appearance of metal contact strips and test the connection of assembled cables
by referring to Checking the Appearance of Metal Contact Strips and Testing the Connection of
Assembled Cables.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for clear identification.
It is recommended that the content of the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.
Step 4 Lay out the new Ethernet cable according to the original or on-site routing requirements.
Step 5 Disconnect the Ethernet cable to be replaced from the ports.
Step 6 Connect the new Ethernet cable to the original ports.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details,
see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 8 Bind the new Ethernet cable with cable ties.
Step 9 Check the items in Table 8-5.
Table 8-5 Checklist for Ethernet cable replacement
Item

Result

Action

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the cable and reconnect it.

The connectors of the


cable are properly
inserted into the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Alarms related to
network
communications are
cleared.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Clear these alarms by referring to the alarm


online help on the LMT. If the faults persist,
contact Huawei for technical support.

Two ends connected by


the cable can properly
communicate with
each other after the
Ping command is
executed in DOS
mode.

Yes

End the check.

No

Check the cable connection. If the cable


connection is faulty, replace it with a new one.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced Ethernet cable to prevent environmental pollution.

8.5 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable


This section describes how to replace a clock signal cable. It takes five to twenty minutes to
replace a clock signal cable depending on the installation position of the reference clock.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap and diagonal pliers.

The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

A new clock signal cable is ready.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
Lay clock signal cables or install clock signal cables by referring to Installing the Clock Signal
Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be identical with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the new clock signal cable according to the original routing or according to the new
routing requirements on site.
Step 3 Disconnect the clock signal cable from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new clock signal cable to the original ports.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
Content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details,
see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the new clock signal cables.
Step 7 After replacing the clock signal cable, check the items in Table 8-6.
Table 8-6 Checklist for clock signal cable replacement
Item

Result

Action

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the cable and reconnect it.

The connectors of the


clock signal cable are
properly inserted into
the ports.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connectors.

Yes

End the check.

No

Clear these alarms by referring to the alarm online


help on the LMT. If the faults persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.

Alarms related to the


clock signal cable are
cleared.

----End
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced clock signal cable to prevent environmental pollution.

8.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable


This section describes how to replace a Y-shaped clock cable. It takes about 5 to 20 minutes to
replace a Y-shaped clock cable, depending on the installation position of the Y-shaped clock
cable.

Prerequisites
l

The tools and items required for replacing a Y-shaped clock cable are ready. The tools and
items are ESD wrist strap and diagonal pliers.

The required materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

A new Y-shaped clock cable is ready.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

CAUTION
Replacing the Y-shaped clock cable triggers a clock alarm and leads to a failover of the SCUa.
Lay Y-shaped clock cables or install Y-shaped clock cables by referring to Installing the YShaped Clock Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the number, length, and type of the clock cables to be replaced. Attach temporary labels
to the new cables to distinguish them from others. The content on the temporary label should be
identical to the content on the engineering label of the Y-shaped clock cable to be replaced.
Step 2 Ensure that the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to an SCUa in standby mode. Before replacing
the Y-shaped clock cable connecting to the active SCUa, switch the SCUa from the active state
to the standby state.
Step 3 Disconnect the Y-shaped clock cable from the ports.
Step 4 Lay out the new Y-shaped clock cable according to the original route.
Step 5 Connect the new Y-shaped clock cable to the original ports.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Step 6 Replace the temporary label on the new cable with the engineering label.
The content on the engineering label of the new Y-shaped clock cable must be identical to the
content on the engineering label of the original Y-shaped clock cable. For details, see Attaching
an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 7 Bind the new Y-shaped clock cable.
Step 8 After replacing the Y-shaped clock cable, check the items listed in Table 8-7.
Table 8-7 Checklist for the new Y-shaped clock cable
Item

Result

Action

Check whether the


physical connection is
correct.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Remove the Y-shaped clock cable


and reconnect it.

Check whether the


connector of the Yshaped clock cable is
properly inserted into the
port.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Secure the insertion.

Check whether alarms


related to the clock cable
are cleared.

Yes

End the check.

No

1. Handle the alarm by referring to


the alarm help information on the
LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced Y-shaped clock cable in an environment-friendly way.

8.7 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable


This section describes how to replace the RS485 communication cable. It takes about five
minutes to replace the RS485 communication cable.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready, including the ESD gloves, diagonal pliers, and flat-head screwdriver.

The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.

A new RS485 communication cable is ready.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.
Lay RS485 communication cables or install RS485 communication cables by referring to
Installing the EMU RS485 Communication Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Lay out the new signal cable according to the original routing, or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 2 On the EMU side, remove the DB9 male connector on one end of the EMU RS485
communication cable from the DB9 female socket on the EMU.
Step 3 On the BSC6900 side, remove the RJ45 connector on the other end of the EMU RS485
communication cable from the J1 port on the power distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet.
Step 4 According to the original cable positions, connect a new RS485 communication cable to the
EMU and the power distribution box.
Step 5 Attach engineering labels to the new RS485 communication cable. For details, see Attaching an
Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
The content on the engineering label of the new RS485 communication cable must be identical
with that on the engineering label of the original RS485 communication cable.
Step 6 Power on the EMU.
Step 7 Test the EMU by referring to the manual delivered with the EMU.
Step 8 If the LEDs on the front panel of the EMU indicate abnormal communication on the serial port,
check the connection.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced RS485 communication cable properly to prevent environmental
pollution.

8.8 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm Box


This section describes how to replace a signal cable connected to the alarm box. It takes five to
twenty minutes to replace a signal cable depending on the installation position of the alarm box.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD gloves, ESD wrist strap, and diagonal pliers.

The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties.

A new signal cable is ready.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version b
to replace a board of version a), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTION
Communication between the alarm box and the LMT PC is disrupted during the replacement.

Procedure
Step 1 Lay out the new signal cable according to the original routing or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 2 Loosen the DB9/DB25 connector and then remove the signal cable from the LMT that reports
alarms.
Step 3 On the alarm box side, power off the alarm box, unlock the alarm box, remove the front panel,
and then disconnect the signal cable.
Step 4 Connect the new signal cable to the LMT PC and the alarm box by referring to the original
connection of the signal cable.
Step 5 Reinstall the front panel and lock the alarm box.
Step 6 Attach engineering labels to the new signal cable. The content of the new label must be the same
as the content of the old one.
Step 7 Power on the alarm box.
Step 8 Test the alarm box by referring to the manual delivered with the alarm box.
Step 9 If the LEDs on the front panel of the alarm box indicate abnormal communication on the serial
port, check the connection.
----End
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.

8.9 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power


Distribution Box
This section describes how to replace a monitoring cable of the power distribution box. It takes
about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring cable.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip, diagonal pliers, and Phillips
screwdriver.

The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

A new monitoring cable is ready.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the monitoring cable.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring cable to be replaced from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new monitoring cable to the original ports.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
Content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details,
see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the monitoring cable.
Step 7 After replacing the monitoring cable of the power distribution box, check the items in Table
8-8.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Table 8-8 Checklist for monitoring cable replacement


Item

Result

Action

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the monitoring cable and connect the


cable again.

The connectors of the


monitoring cable are
properly inserted into
the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

LEDs on the panel


properly indicate the
running of power
distribution box.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Contact Huawei for technical support.

Yes

End the check.

No

Clear these alarms by referring to the alarm


online help on the LMT. If the faults persist,
contact Huawei for technical support.

Cable connection is
correct.

Alarms related to the


monitoring cable are
cleared.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced monitoring cable to prevent environmental pollution.

8.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the


Independent Fan Subrack
This section describes how to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
It takes about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip, diagonal pliers, and Phillips
screwdriver.

The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

A new monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is ready.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be identical with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the new monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Step 3 Disconnect the monitoring signal cable to be replaced from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new monitoring signal cable to the corresponding port.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For
details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.
Step 6 Bind the monitoring signal cable to other cables.
Step 7 After replacing the monitoring signal cable, check the items in Table 8-9.
Table 8-9 Checklist for monitoring signal cable replacement
Item

Result

Action

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Remove the monitoring signal cable and connect


the cable again.

The connectors of the


monitoring signal cable
are securely connected
to the ports.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Secure the connectors of the monitoring signal


cable.

The LEDs on the panel


of the independent fan
subrack correctly
indicate the state of the
fan box.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Contact Huawei for technical support.

Yes

End the check.

No

Clear the alarms by referring to the alarm online


help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical support.

Cable connection is
correct.

Alarms related to the


monitoring signal cable
are cleared.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced monitoring signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.

8.11 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable


This section describes how to replace an SFP+ high-speed cable. It takes about 10 minutes to
replace an SFP+ high-speed cable.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Prerequisites
l

The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, the ESD box or bag, and the diagonal
pliers.

A new SFP+ high-speed cable is ready.

Context

CAUTION
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
For details on how to install SFP+ high-speed cables, see Installing the Inter-SCUb SFP+ HighSpeed Cables Between Different Subracks.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the SFP+ high-speed cables to be replaced. Attach
temporary label to the new cable for easy identification. The content on the temporary label
should be consistent with that on the engineering label of the SFP+ high-speed cable to be
replaced.
Step 2 Confirm that the SCUb whose SFP+ high-speed cable is to be replaced works in standby mode.
If the SCUb works in active mode, perform active/standby switchover on the SCUb boards.
Step 3 Pull out the connector of the SFP+ high-speed cable to be replaced from where it is inserted by
the handle, as shown in Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1 SFP+ High-Speed Cable

Step 4 Lay out the new SFP+ high-speed cable according to the original routing.
Step 5 Connect the new SFP+ high-speed cable to the corresponding ports.
Step 6 Replace the temporary label on the new SFP+ high-speed cable with the engineering label.
The content on the engineering label must be consistent with that on the engineering label of the
original SFP+ high-speed cable. For details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal
Cable.
Step 7 Bind the new SFP+ high-speed cable.
Step 8 After replacing the SFP+ high-speed cable, check the items listed in Table 8-10.
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Replacing the Cables

Table 8-10 Checklist for SFP+ high-speed cable replacement


Item

Result

Action

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the SFP+ high-speed


cable and reconnect it.

The connector of the


SFP+ high-speed cable
is properly inserted
into the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Alarms related to
transmission cables are
cleared.

Yes

End the check.

No

1. Clear the alarms by referring


to the alarm online help on
the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei for technical
support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced SFP+ high-speed cable to prevent short circuit and environmental
pollution.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
9.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
9.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
9.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
9.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
9.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
9.12 LEDs on the OMUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
9.13 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
9.14 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.15 LEDs on the POUa Board
There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.16 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
9.17 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
9.18 LEDs on the SCUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
9.19 LEDs on the SPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
9.20 LEDs on the SPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
9.21 LEDs on the UOIa Board
There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.22 LEDs on the UOIc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

9.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-1 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.
Table 9-1 LEDs on the AEUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

9.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-2 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.
Table 9-2 LEDs on the AOUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ALM
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Red

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

LED

ACT

9 LEDs on the Boards

Color

Green

Status

Description

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

9.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 9-3 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.
Table 9-3 LEDs on the AOUc board
LED

Colo
r

Status

Description

RUN

Gree
n

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

Gree
n

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

Gree
n

ON

The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF

The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

ALM

ACT

LOS

Red

9.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

Table 9-4 LEDs on the DPUb board


LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is functional.

OFF

The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

9.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.
Table 9-5 LEDs on the DPUe board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is functional.

OFF

The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

ALM

ACT

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Red

Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

9.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 9-6 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.
Table 9-6 LEDs on the FG2a board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

9.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 9-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

Table 9-7 LEDs on the FG2c board


LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Orange

9.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-8 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 9-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

LED

ALM

ACT

9 LEDs on the Boards

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

9.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-9 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Table 9-9 LEDs on the GOUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

9.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 9-10 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

Table 9-10 LEDs on the GOUc board


LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

LINK (optical
port LED)

Green

ACT (optical
port LED)

Green

9.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
Table 9-11 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.
Table 9-11 LEDs on the OMUa board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status

Description

ALM

Red

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

ON

The board can be removed.

OFF

The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is being switched over to


the other working mode.

OFF

There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking

The hard disk is being read or


written to.

ACT

OFFLINE

HD

Green

Blue

Green

9.12 LEDs on the OMUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
Table 9-12 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.
Table 9-12 LEDs on the OMUc board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

ON

The board can be removed.

ALM

ACT

OFL
Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Red

Green

Blue

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

LED

HDD

9 LEDs on the Boards

Color

Green

Status

Description

OFF

The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is being switched over to


the other working mode.

OFF

There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking

The hard disk is being read or


written to.

9.13 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 9-13 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Table 9-13 LEDs on the PAMU board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The PAMU board is functional and


communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF


for 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does not


communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

OFF

The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON

The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

ALM

Red

9.14 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-14 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

Table 9-14 LEDs on the PEUa board


LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

9.15 LEDs on the POUa Board


There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-15 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.
Table 9-15 LEDs on the POUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Red

Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

9.16 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 9-16 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.
Table 9-16 LEDs on the POUc board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF

The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

ALM

ACT

LOS

Red

Green

Green

9.17 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 9-17 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.
Table 9-17 LEDs on the SCUa board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

LED

ALM

ACT

9 LEDs on the Boards

Color

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

Status

Description

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

9.18 LEDs on the SCUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
Table 9-18 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.
Table 9-18 LEDs on the SCUb board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ALM

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Red

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status

Description

ACT

Green

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

10G LINK

Green

9.19 LEDs on the SPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 9-19 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.
Table 9-19 LEDs on the SPUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ALM

ACT

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Red

Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status

Description

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

OFF

There is no data transmission over


the Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

9.20 LEDs on the SPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 9-20 describes the LEDs on the SPUb board.
Table 9-20 LEDs on the SPUb board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data transmission over


the Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Orange

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 LEDs on the Boards

9.21 LEDs on the UOIa Board


There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 9-21 describes the LEDs on the UOIa board.
Table 9-21 LEDs on the UOIa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

9.22 LEDs on the UOIc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 9-22 describes the LEDs on the UOIc board.
Table 9-22 LEDs on the UOIc board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

LED

Colo
r

Status

Description

RUN

Gree
n

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

LED

Colo
r

Status

Description

ALM

Red

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

Gree
n

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

Gree
n

ON

The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF

The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

ACT

LOS

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

9 LEDs on the Boards

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

10

DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
10.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
10.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board
The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
10.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board
The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
10.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
10.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
10.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
10.7 DIP Switches on the POUa Board
The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

10.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 10-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.
Figure 10-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 10-1 describes the bits.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

Table 10-1 Description about the bits


Bit

Description

1-5

Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

Odd parity check bit

Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant


bit)

Startup type of the subrack, the default value is OFF.


NOTE
l For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6810 to BSC6900, keep
the former settings.
l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed to
OFF.

CAUTION
l You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the poweron is invalid.

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1.

Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2.

Set bit 7 to ON.

3.

Set bit 8 to OFF.

4.

Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.


l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Table 10-2 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.
Table 10-2 Setting of the DIP switch

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Subr
ack
No.

Bit
1

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Setting of the
DIP Switch

232

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

Subr
ack
No.

Bit
1

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OF
F

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OF
F

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Setting of the
DIP Switch

10.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board


The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 10-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 10-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

(1) Sub-board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

(2) Bottom plate

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components


NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 10-2, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the subboard, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 10-2 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

Description of the DIP Switches


DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 10-3 describes S2, S4, S6,
S8, and S10.
Table 10-3 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board
DIP Switch

Bit

Description

Setting of
DIP Bit

Meaning

S2

1-8

TX ground switch
of E1s/T1s/J1s 24
to 31

ON

Set the working mode


to E1 unbalanced mode

OFF

Set the working mode


to other modes

TX ground switch
of E1s/T1s/J1s 16
to 23

ON

Set the working mode


to E1 unbalanced mode

OFF

Set the working mode


to other modes

TX ground switch
of E1s/T1s/J1s 0
to 7

ON

Set the working mode


to E1 unbalanced mode

OFF

Set the working mode


to other modes

TX ground switch
of E1s/T1s/J1s 8
to 15

ON

Set the working mode


to E1 unbalanced mode

S4

S6

S8

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

1-8

1-8

1-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switch

Bit

S10

1-2

Description

DIP switch for


setting the
working mode,
consisting of two
bits

Setting of
DIP Bit

Meaning

OFF

Set the working mode


to other modes

(ON, ON)

Set the working mode


to E1 unbalanced mode

(OFF, ON)

Set the working mode


to E1 balanced mode

(ON, OFF)

Set the working mode


to T1 mode

(OFF, OFF)

Set the working mode


to J1 mode

10.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board


The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 10-3 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 10-3 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

(1) Sub-board

(2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is
faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 10-4 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.
Table 10-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

DIP Switch

Bit

Setting of
DIP Bit

Meaning

S1

1-2

(ON, ON)

Set loading mode to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF)

Set loading mode to CPU slave parallel


configuration

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

DIP Switch

10 DIP Switches on Components

Bit

Setting of
DIP Bit

Meaning

ON

Set working mode to T1 mode

OFF

Set working mode to E1 mode

ON

Set the mapped path to AU3

OFF

Set the mapped path to AU4

ON

Set the information structure to TU11

OFF

Set the information structure to TU12

ON

SONET

OFF

SDH

Reserved

Reserved

10.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 10-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
Figure 10-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
10-5.
Table 10-5 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Address

Bit

Setting of DIP Bit

Description

1 (the most significant


bit)

ON

ON

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

Address

Bit

Setting of DIP Bit

Description

ON

4 (the least significant


bit)

ON

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 10-5.

10.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 10-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.
Figure 10-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

(2) Bottom plate

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 10-5, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the subboard, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 10-5 is to
turn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4,
S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits
of S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 10-6 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.
Table 10-6 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board
DIP
Switc
h

Bit

Description

Setting of DIP
Switch

Meaning

S2

1-8

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

S4

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

1-8

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

DIP
Switc
h

Bit

Description

Setting of DIP
Switch

Meaning

S6

1-8

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

(ON, ON)

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON)

Setting the
working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF)

Setting the
working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF)

Setting the
working mode to
J1 mode

S8

S10

1-8

1-2

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

DIP switch for setting the


working mode,
consisting of two bits

10.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 10-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 10-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 10-7. For how to remove the fan box, see 7.25 Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the
DIP switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.
Table 10-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch

Bit

Setting of DIP
Switch

Description

SW1

1 (the least significant


bit)

OFF

ON

ON

4 (the most significant


bit)

ON

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 10-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 10-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 10-8. For how to remove the fan box, see 7.25 Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting,
the address of the PFCU board is 4.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

Table 10-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch

Bit

Setting of DIP
Switch

Description

SW1

1 (the least significant


bit)

ON

ON

OFF

4 (the most significant


bit)

ON

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

10.7 DIP Switches on the POUa Board


The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 10-8 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 10-8 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board

(1) Sub-board

(2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel
is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 10-9 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.
Table 10-9 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

DIP Switch

Bit

Setting of DIP Bit

Meaning

S1

1-2

(ON, ON)

Setting loading mode


to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF)

Setting loading mode


to CPU slave parallel
configuration

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

DIP Switch

10 DIP Switches on Components

Bit

Setting of DIP Bit

Meaning

ON

Setting working mode


to T1 mode

OFF

Setting working mode


to E1 mode

ON

Setting the mapped


path to AU3

OFF

Setting the mapped


path to AU4

ON

Setting the
information structure
to TU11

OFF

Setting the
information structure
to TU12

ON

SONET

OFF

SDH

Reserved

Reserved

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11

11 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record

BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record

This chapter describes the BSC6900 site maintenance record.


Table 11-1 presents the BSC6900 site maintenance record.
Table 11-1 BSC6900 site maintenance record
Site name:

Maintenance Date:

Time of fault
occurring:

Time of fault clearing:

Maintenance type

Operator:

Maintenance type

Replacing a board

Replacing a cable

Replacing the
subrack, fan box,
or power
distribution box

Routine cleaning

Expanding the
subrack

Others

Maintenance
operations:
Commissioning
result:

Issue 06 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

Você também pode gostar